Charger
OWNER’S MANUAL
Fifth Edition Rev 1
Printed in the U.S.A.
18LD-126-AE
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2018
Charger
2018
DID_3636001_18e_Charger_OM_EN_070318.indd 1 7/3/18 11:19 AM
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
WARNING:
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC
DID_3636001_18e_Charger_OM_EN_070318.indd 2 7/3/2018 11:22:01 AM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................3
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS ......................................................7
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................13
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .........................................117
5
SAFETY ........................................................................145
6
STARTINGANDOPERATING.........................................................219
7
INCASEOFEMERGENCY ...........................................................299
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .....................................................351
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................419
10
MULTIMEDIA ....................................................................435
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ............................................................527
12
INDEX..........................................................................533
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured
that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styl-
ing, and high quality. This Owner’s Manual has been
prepared with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with the operation and mainte-
nance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty
Information, and customer oriented documents. In the
attached Warranty Booklet, you will find a description of
the services that FCA offers to its customers, the Warranty
Certificate and the details of the terms and conditions for
maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of
these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for
the first time. Following the instructions, recommenda-
tions, tips, and important warnings in this manual will
help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particu-
larly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and
transfer case shifting (if equipped). Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will
improve with experience.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle.
Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or
versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore,
you should only consider the information which is related
to the trim level, engine, and version that you have
purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Own-
er’s Information, that may or may not be applicable to your
vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help
you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA aims at
a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this
reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
NOTE: After reviewing the Owner’s Information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that an authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
4 INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra-
tions may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose sym-
bols indicate precautions to be observed when using this
component. Refer to “Warning Lights and Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
1
INTRODUCTION 5
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Doors 4 — Windshield
2 — Exterior Mirrors 5 — Headlights
3 — Wheels/Tires 6 — Hood/Engine Compartment
8 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
REAR VIEW
Rear View
1 — Rear Lights
2 — Trunk
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 9
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls 7 — Ignition
2 — Paddle Shifters 8 — Switch Panel
3 — Multifunction Lever (Behind Steering Wheel) 9 — Uconnect System
4 — Headlight Switch (Behind Steering Wheel) 10 — Climate Controls
5 — Instrument Cluster 11 — Front Power Outlet
6 — Speed Controls
10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTERIOR
Interior
1 — Door Locks 5 — Seats
2 — Door Handles 6 — Gear Selector
3 — Window Switches 7 — Glove Compartment
4 — Memory Seat Switches
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 KEYS .................................17
▫ KeyFob..............................17
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH .......................25
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition ...............25
▫ Vehicle On Message .....................27
䡵 REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .............28
▫ How To Use Remote Start — If Equipped ......28
▫ Remote Start Abort Message On The Instrument
Cluster Display — If Equipped ..............29
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode ................29
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle ...............................30
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle ...............................30
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . .31
▫ General Information .....................31
䡵 SENTRY KEY ...........................31
▫ Customer Key Programming ...............32
▫ Replacement Keys .......................32
▫ General Information .....................33
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .33
▫ To Arm The System .....................33
▫ To Disarm The System ....................34
▫ Rearming Of The System ..................35
▫ Tamper Alert ...........................35
䡵 DOORS ...............................35
▫ Manual Door Locks ......................35
▫ Power Door Locks ......................36
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry .........37
3
▫ Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit ............41
▫ Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ........41
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors ...............................41
䡵 SEATS ................................43
▫ Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped .43
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped ................45
▫ Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped ..........47
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ................50
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .........52
▫ Folding Rear Seat .......................53
䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS ......................54
▫ Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats .......55
▫ Rear Head Restraints ....................56
▫ Front Head Restraint Removal ..............57
䡵 STEERING WHEEL .......................57
▫ Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — If
Equipped .............................57
▫ Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — If
Equipped .............................58
▫ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped.........59
䡵 MIRRORS ..............................60
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ......60
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped .....61
▫ Outside Mirrors ........................62
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped .............................62
▫ Outside Mirrors Approach Light — If Equipped . .62
▫ Power Mirrors .........................62
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .............63
▫ Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped .....63
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped .....64
䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS .......................64
▫ Headlight Switch .......................64
▫ Multifunction Lever .....................65
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped . .65
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ..................66
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped ........66
▫ Flash-To-Pass ..........................67
▫ Automatic Headlights ....................67
▫ Parking Lights .........................67
▫ Headlights On With Wipers ................67
▫ Headlight Time Delay ....................68
▫ Lights-On Reminder .....................68
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped .................68
▫ Turn Signals ...........................69
▫ Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ..........69
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS .......................69
▫ Courtesy Lights .........................70
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ........73
▫ Wiper Operation ........................73
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ..........74
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS .....................76
▫ Manual Climate Control Overview ...........76
▫ Automatic Climate Control Overview .........82
▫ Climate Control Functions .................87
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped .............................88
▫ Operating Tips .........................89
䡵 WINDOWS .............................91
▫ Power Window Controls ..................91
▫ Wind Buffeting .........................94
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ..........94
▫ Opening Sunroof ........................95
▫ Closing Sunroof.........................95
▫ Wind Buffeting .........................96
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express.................96
▫ Sunshade Operation......................96
▫ Pinch Protect Feature .....................96
▫ Sunroof Maintenance .....................96
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
▫ Ignition Off Operation ....................96
▫ Relearn Procedure .......................97
䡵 HOOD ................................97
▫ To Open The Hood ......................97
▫ To Close The Hood ......................98
䡵 TRUNK ...............................98
▫ Opening .............................98
▫ Closing .............................100
▫ Trunk Safety ..........................100
▫ Cargo Area Features ....................101
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .102
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink .....102
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .......105
▫ Using HomeLink .......................107
▫ Security..............................107
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ....................107
▫ General Information .....................108
䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ..................109
▫ Storage ..............................109
▫ Cupholders ...........................111
▫ Electrical Power Outlets ..................112
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door ....................115
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition
system consists of a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) and a START/STOP push button ignition system.
The Remote Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob and
Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if equipped.
NOTE: The key fob may not be found if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these
devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
trunk from distances up to approximately 66 feet (20 m)
using a handheld key fob. The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: In the ON/RUN position, key fob commands are
disabled if the vehicle is at or above 5 MPH.
The key fob also contains an emergency key, which is
stored in the rear of the key fob.
Key Fob
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. The
emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the glove
compartment. You can keep the emergency key with you
when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical release
button on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead
battery. In this situation, a backup method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob
(side opposite of the Emergency Key) against the ENGINE
START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition
switch.
Emergency Key Emergency Key Removal Process
1 — Mechanical Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door or twice within five seconds to
unlock all doors.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also be activated.
NOTE: All door unlock settings can be programmed to
your convenience through Uconnect Settings. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
• Unlock the driver door on the first push of the key fob
unlock button.
• Unlock all doors on the first push of the key fob unlock
button.
NOTE: To unlock doors and trunk with passive entry,
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in
“Doors” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
NOTE: When you use the key fob to open any door, the
courtesy lights, overhead lights, and approach lighting in
the outside mirrors (if equipped) will turn on. Refer to
“Interior Lights” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
further information.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the unlock
button on the key fob.
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
Flash Lights With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked with the key fob. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the key fob. The time for
this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through
Uconnect. To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
To Unlatch The Trunk
Push the trunk button on the key fob two times within five
seconds to unlatch the trunk.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” under “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
To Lock The Doors And Trunk
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors.
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to
acknowledge the signal if programmed. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further programmable infor-
mation.
NOTE: To lock the doors with passive entry, Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in “Doors”
in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
If one or more doors are open, or the trunk is open, the
doors will lock. The doors will unlock automatically if the
key is left inside the passenger compartment, otherwise the
doors will stay locked.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are
locked with the key fob. This feature can be turned on or
turned off. To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push the Panic
button on the key fob. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you
turn it off by either pushing the Panic button a second time
or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or
greater.
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Alarm
is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will
remain on.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic
Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the
system.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for fur-
ther information.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the emergency key out with your
other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
2. Separate the key fob halves using the tip of the emer-
gency key, a #2 flat blade screwdriver, or a coin and
gently pry the two halves of the key fob apart. Make
sure not to damage the seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
Separating Case With A Coin
NOTE: Separating the case can also be done with a key
blade or a flat head screwdriver.
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Separating Case With A Key Blade Separating Case With A Flat Blade Screwdriver
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar surface, and then
replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match
the + sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the
battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching
the new battery with your fingers because skin oils may
cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean
it with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an autho-
rized dealer.
NOTE: Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another ve-
hicle.
Request For Additional Remote Controls
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
WARNING!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF mode.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
ON/RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: If the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite
of the emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE
START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition
switch.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• Some electrical devices (e.g. central locking, alarm, etc.)
are still available.
ACC
• Engine is not started.
• Some electrical devices are available.
ON/RUN
• Driving position.
• All the electrical devices are available.
START
• The engine will start.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
(Continued)
START/STOP Ignition Button
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Al-
ways remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE: Refer to ⬙Starting The Engine,⬙ in ⬙Starting And
Operating⬙ for further information.
Vehicle On Message
When opening the driver’s door and the ignition is in
ON/RUN (engine not running) position, a chime will
sound to remind you to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
In addition to the chime, the Vehicle On message will
display in the cluster (if equipped).
NOTE: The power window switches and power sunroof (if
equipped) will remain active for three minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete
stop, then shift the automatic transmission into
PARK, apply the parking brake, place the engine in
the OFF position, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock your vehicle. If equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless
ignition is in “OFF” position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Al-
ways remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
How To Use Remote Start — If Equipped
Push remote start button on the key fob twice
within five seconds. Pushing the remote start
button a third time shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and push the
ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
• With remote start, the engine will only run for 15
minutes (timeout) unless the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position.
• The vehicle must be started with the key after two
consecutive timeouts.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Trunk closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• Check engine light shall not be present
• PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
• Vehicle Security Alarm is not signaling an intrusion
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monox-
ide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message On The Instrument
Cluster Display — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is turned to
the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the remote start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof opera-
tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the key fob. However, the ignition must be cycled by
pushing the START/STOP button twice (or the ignition
switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN position) before
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the remote start button one time or allow
the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable with a one time push of the remote start button for
two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors and
disarm the vehicle security alarm (if equipped). Then, prior
to the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the
START/STOP button. If the START/STOP button is not
present, insert the key fob into the ignition switch and turn
the switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry feature, the ignition switch must be in the
ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start Active —
Insert Key and Turn To Run” will show in the instrument
cluster display until you insert the key.
•
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start Active —
Push Start Button” will show in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START button.
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Cancel Remote Start
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following
occur:
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm.
• Any engine warning lights come on.
• Low Fuel Light turns on.
• The hood is opened.
• The hazard switch is pushed.
• The gear selector is moved out of PARK.
• The brake pedal is pushed.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When remote start is activated, the heated steering wheel
and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on
in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat
feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is
activated. These features will stay on through the duration
of remote start or until the ignition switch is cycled to the
ON/RUN position.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
The system uses key fobs that have an embedded electronic
chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera-
tion. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone
uses an invalid key to try to start the engine.
NOTE: A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the ignition
or lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after placing the ignition in the
on position, the vehicle security light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the vehicle security light begins
to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used
an invalid key to try to start the engine. Either of these
conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two
seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than ten seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Customer Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
(Continued)
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming
a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors for
unauthorized entry and the keyless push button ignition
for unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security
alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and trunk
release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
vehicle security alarm will provide the following audible
and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park lamps
and/or turn signals will flash, and the vehicle security light
in the instrument cluster will flash.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
mode. Refer to ⬙Ignition Switch⬙ in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle” for further information.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push lock on the interior power door lock switch with
the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry,⬙ located in “Doors” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle⬙ for further information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
NOTE: Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle, if
equipped. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry,” located in “Doors” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” for further information.
• Push the Keyless Enter-N-Go ignition button (requires at
least one valid key fob in the vehicle).
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security
alarm.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm
the vehicle security alarm.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn the horn off
after 29 seconds, five seconds between cycles, up to eight
cycles if the trigger remains active and the vehicle security
alarm will rearm itself.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the vehicle security alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
vehicle security alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
upward.
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the
door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Door Lock Knob
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel.
Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry system. Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in this section for
further information.
Power Door Lock Switches
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door is
open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you
from accidentally locking the key fob in the vehicle. Placing
the ignition in the OFF position or closing the door will
allow the locks to operate. If the driver door is open, and
the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the key fob.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehi-
cle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock
or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed on or off. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and
arm the security alarm (if equipped).
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle
passive entry system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices
may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
passive entry handle from locking/unlocking the ve-
hicle.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver’s door handle, grab the front driver door handle to
unlock the driver’s door automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s
door handle. For further information regarding selecting
“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st
Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior
door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed, regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any passive entry vehicle.
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob
while a door is open.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle
while a door is open.
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
Passive Entry key fob inside the car and it does not find
any Passive Entry key fobs outside the car, then the car will
unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected outside the vehicle.
The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the
following conditions are true:
• The doors are locked manually using the door lock
knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the vehicle
and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry door
handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
To Enter The Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
deck lid, push the button on the right side of CHMSL
(Center High Mounted Stop Light), which is located on the
deck lid.
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry key fob in the trunk and try to close the deck lid, the
deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless another one of
the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs is outside the vehicle
and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the deck lid.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push
the door handle lock button to lock all four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob
lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s
interior door panel.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to
0 mph (0 km/h) and the transmission is placed in PARK.
3. The driver door is opened.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
NOTE: Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accor-
dance with local laws.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto
door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by an autho-
rized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see
an authorized dealer for service.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with Child-
Protection Door Lock system.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock
System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the lock or unlock position.
3. Repeat steps one and two for the opposite rear door.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside with the Child-Protection locks are en-
gaged (locked).
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll
down the window, and open the door using the outside
door handle.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired.
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Manual Front Seat Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard
side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and
release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean
forward and release the lever.
Manual Seat Adjusting Bar
Manual Recline Lever
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Power Seats — If Equipped
On models equipped with power seats, the switch is
located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use
this switch to move the driver’s seat up, down, forward,
rearward, or to recline the seatback.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seat Control
2 — Seatback Control
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch; the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat
switch. The front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch.
Each memory profile contains desired position settings for
the driver seat, side mirrors, and power tilt and telescopic
steering column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Your remote keyless entry key fob can also
be programmed to recall the same positions when the
unlock button is pushed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, one
key fob can be linked to memory position 1 and the other
key fob can be linked to memory position 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: The set (S)
button, which is used to activate the memory save func-
tion, and the memory (1) and (2) buttons, which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
Power Lumbar Switch
Memory Seat Switches
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and telescopic
steering column [if equipped], and radio station pre-
sets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument cluster dis-
play will display which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory
profile.
• To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key
Fob To Memory” in this section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two
pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the unlock
button on the key fob.
NOTE: Before programming your key fobs you must select
the “Personal Settings Linked To Fob” feature through the
Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2). The system will
recall any stored settings for this profile. Wait for the
system to complete the memory recall before continuing
to step three.
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this section for
instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the
set (S) button on the memory switch, then push and
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
release memory button (1) or memory button (2) accord-
ingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
instrument cluster display.
4. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within
10 seconds.
NOTE: Your key fobs can be unlinked from your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, and within 10
seconds push the unlock button on the key fob.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will display in the instrument cluster
display.
To recall the memory settings for driver 1, push memory
button (1) on the driver’s door or the unlock button on the
key fob linked to memory position 1.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the
memory settings will be recalled with a Passive Entry
Unlock into the driver’s door using the key fob linked to
position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver 2, push memory
button (2) on the driver’s door or the unlock button on the
key fob linked to memory position 2.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the
memory settings will be recalled with a Passive Entry
Unlock into the driver’s door using the key fob linked to
position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the memory
buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver’s door during a recall.
When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat or power tilt
and telescopic steering column (if equipped) stop moving.
A delay of one second will occur before another recall can
be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you
have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the vehi-
cle’s ignition to the OFF position.
• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF posi-
tion, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm)
rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or
equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.
The seat will return to its previously set position when
you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or RUN
position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/
Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the
programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped
with heaters located in the seat cushions and seat backs.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seat control buttons are located within the
climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings. The
indicator arrows in touchscreen buttons indicate the level
of heat in use. Two indicator arrows will illuminate for HI,
and one for LO. Turning the heating elements off will
return the user to the radio screen.
• Press the heated seat button
once to turn the HI
setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LO setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automati-
cally switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting
will turn off automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
(Continued)
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these seats
are located on the rear of the center console. There are two
heated seat switches
that allow the rear passengers to
operate the seats independently.
You can choose from HI, LO, or off heat settings. The
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO,
and none for off.
• Push the heated seat button
once to select HI-level
heating.
• Push the heated seat button
a second time to select
LO-level heating.
• Push the heated seat button
a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automati-
cally switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the number of illumi-
nated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the
change. The LO-level setting will turn off automatically
after approximately 45 minutes.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep
the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient
temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a second time to
choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to turn
the ventilated seat off.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the venti-
lated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote
start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on
the loops located on the upper seatback.
NOTE: These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
Rear Seatback Loop
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stabil-
ity for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position)
should not be used as a play area by children when
the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously
injured in a collision. Children should be seated and
using the proper restraint system.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear-impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
Folded Rear Seatback
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear
of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain
additional clearance to the back of your head.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact, the RHRs will automatically extend forward mini-
mizing the gap between the back of the occupant’s head
and the RHR.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal posi-
tion following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not return to
their normal position, see your authorized dealer immedi-
ately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located at the base of the head restraint and push
downward on the head restraint.
Adjustment Button
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
The center head restraint has two adjustable positions: up
or down. When the center seat is being occupied, the head
restraint should be in the raised position. When there are
no occupants in the center seat, the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located at the base of the head restraint and push
downward on the head restraint.
NOTE:
• The head restraint should only be removed by qualified
technicians, for service purposes only. If the center rear
head restraints requires removal, see your authorized
dealer.
• The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.
Adjustment Button
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
Front Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as it can go.
Then, push the adjustment button and the release button at
the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into
the holes. Then, adjust it to the appropriate height.
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to
the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
STEERING WHEEL
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — If
Equipped
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below
the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward.
To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or
push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — If
Equipped
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering col-
umn switch is located below the multifunction lever on the
steering column.
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To tilt the steering column, move the switch up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the switch toward you or push the switch away from you
as desired.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your remote keyless entry key fob or the
memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to return
the tilt/telescopic steering column to pre-programmed
positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in this section.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on for an
average of 80 minutes or more before automatically shut-
ting off. This time will vary based on environmental
temperatures. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn
the heating element on.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a second time
to turn the heating element off.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a
twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield.
The mirror installs on the windshield button with a coun-
terclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting.
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while the small control under the mirror is set
in the day position (toward the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on or off
through the touchscreen.
•
Press the mirror dimmer button once to turn the feature on.
• Press the mirror dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature off.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of
the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give
a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane
next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other
object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will automati-
cally adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror
adjusts.
Outside Mirrors Approach Light — If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors equipped with ap-
proach lighting contain one LED, which is located in the
upper outboard mirror glass corner. The approach light
supplies illuminated entry lighting, which turns on in both
mirrors when you use the remote keyless entry key fob or
open any door. This LED shines outward to illuminate the
front and rear door handles. It also shines downward to
illuminate the area in front of the doors.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s door
trim panel.
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select the
mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the select button will illuminate indicat-
ing the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate
Controls” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside
mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position when the
vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each stored
memory setting will have an associated Tilt Side Mirrors In
Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not
turned on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Side
Mirrors In Reverse feature can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Power Mirror Control
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To
use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing
the mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
parallel to the side window, grab the sun visor and pull
rearwards until the sun visor is in the desired position. To
use the extender feature of the sun visor, grab the extender
which is located at the rear of the visor and pull rearward.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the op-
eration of the headlights, parking lights, instrument
panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior
lights and fog lights.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Slide-On-Rod Feature
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for
parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate
the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light and instrument panel light operation. Push
the switch to enable fog lights (if equipped).
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when the engine
is started and will remain on unless the headlamps are
turned to the on position, the parking brake is applied, or
the engine is shut OFF.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
Headlight Switch Multifunction Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the
headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera de-
tects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from
high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is
out of view.
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off by selecting “ON” under “Auto High
Beam” within your Uconnect settings, as well as turning
the headlight switch to the AUTO position. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens
will cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to
ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
dealer.
To Activate
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight posi-
tion.
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is at
or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward in
vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal
operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the
system.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to pass
position for more than 20 seconds, the high beams will shut
off.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO
position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on
for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the
OFF position. The headlight time delay can be pro-
grammed 0/30/60/90 seconds.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
Parking Lights
Turn the headlight switch knob to the first detent to
turn the parking lights on. This also turns on all
instrument panel lighting.
Headlights On With Wipers
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on after
the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in
the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to on.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
NOTE: The “Headlights On With Wipers” feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit
area with the headlight switch in the O (off) position.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the head-
lights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins when
the headlight switch is turned off.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
If you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition switch
ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable using
the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
Fog Light Switch
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster display illumi-
nates when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster display flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display and a continuous chime will sound
if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or
left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically ten minutes after the ignition is moved to the
OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights were
switched on manually or are on because a door is open.
The Battery Protection also includes the glove compart-
ment light and the trunk light. To restore interior light
operation after automatic battery protection is enabled
(lights off), either place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position or cycle the light switch.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light can
be turned on by pushing the switch on either side of the
console. These buttons are backlit for night time visibility.
Courtesy Lights Front Map/Reading Lights
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The
lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
also turn on when the unlock button on the key fob is
pushed.
Ambient Light — If Equipped
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibility
of the floor and center console area.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Ambient Light
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the
instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if
equipped).
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat (Off)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to the extreme
bottom (O) off position. The interior lights will remain off
when the doors are open.
Dimmer Controls
Instrument Panel Dimmer
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the
first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as
the odometer, instrument cluster display, and radio when
the position lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent,
past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper opera-
tion, or to the second detent past the intermittent settings
for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the wind-
shield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in
any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make
a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles
desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the
first detent position, and then turn the end of the lever to
select the desired delay interval. There are four delay
settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe interval
from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum
of approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is
10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
and then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Mist Feature
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the MIST position
to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate
until you release the multifunction lever.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to
activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive.
Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper
sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver desires more
sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the off position when
not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first
turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not operate
until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater
than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is
greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the igni-
tion is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL
position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until
the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of the
NEUTRAL position.
NOTE: Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Climate Control Overview
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Manual Climate Controls
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Manual Climate Controls
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation
may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create
fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside
air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illumi-
nates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button
on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the face-
plate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow on the
touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The Sync indicator is
illuminated when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting. The Sync feature also synchronizes the rear passen-
gers’ temperature to the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting
while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
Faceplate Knob
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Icon Description
Touchscreen
Buttons
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
Panel Mode Modes Control
Push the button in the center of the knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel out-
lets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control Off Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control on/off.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change
the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when
outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can
be used in all modes except for Defrost. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside
air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and auto-
matic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illumi-
nates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
When toggling the Front Mode Defrost button, the climate system will return to the previous
setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button
on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the face-
plate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow on the
touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The Sync indicator is
illuminated when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while
in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Icon Description
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen
Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
Panel Mode Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Controls off.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, push A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is
on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity,
or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate
interior air by pressing the recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead
to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature
may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out)
if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Tempera-
ture Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger
temperature control buttons. Once the desired tempera-
ture is displayed, the system will achieve and automati-
cally maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable fea-
ture. Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended, because it may
cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam-
age when the system is started again.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select De-
frost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do
not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from
the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin
air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Operating Tips Chart WINDOWS
Power Window Controls
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition is
in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Power Window Switches
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect system,
the power window switches will remain active for up to
ten minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time
is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and, in some models, passenger power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window
switch to the second detent, release, and the window will
go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
Pull window up switch to second detent for at least a half
of a second and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window during an Auto-Up operation, push or
pull the window switch again.
To close the window part way, pull and hold the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the window to
stop.
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto-
Closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the Auto-Reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull and hold the switch to close
the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim panel
allows you to disable the window controls on the rear
passenger doors and the rear sunscreen (if equipped). To
disable the window controls and the rear sunscreen, push
and release the window lockout button (setting it in the
down position). To enable the window controls and the
rear sunscreen, push and release the window lockout
button again (setting it in the up position).
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
Window Lockout Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
(Continued)
Power Sunroof Switch
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sun-
roof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. In-
jury may result.
Opening Sunroof
Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically
and stop when the full open position is reached. This is
called “Express Open.” During Express Open operation,
any other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward.
The sunroof will move rearward and automatically stop at
full open position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is
pushed again.
Closing Sunroof
Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express Close
operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch forward.
The sunroof will move forward and automatically stop at
full closed position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any other
actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of the
sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an obstruc-
tion in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this oc-
curs.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
NOTE:
• The power sunroof switch can remain active in Acces-
sory Delay for up to approximately ten minutes after the
vehicle’s ignition is placed to the OFF position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
• This feature is programmable using the Uconnect Sys-
tem. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Relearn Procedure
For vehicles equipped with a sunroof, there is a relearn
procedure that allows you to calibrate the sunroof when
the “Express Operation” feature stops working. To reset the
sunroof, follow these steps:
1. Set the ignition to the ACC or the ON/RUN position.
2. Ensure that the sunroof is in the fully closed position.
3. Push and hold the close switch. The sunroof will hit the
hard stop and move to the vent position after ten
seconds.
4. Release the close switch.
5. Push and hold the close switch again within five sec-
onds to begin the teaching process. The sunroof will
complete one full cycle and return to the fully closed
position.
NOTE: If the close switch is released anytime during the
teach cycle, the procedure will need to be repeated starting
from the first step.
6. Once the sunroof has stopped in the fully closed posi-
tion, release the close switch. The sunroof is now reset
and ready to use.
HOOD
To Open The Hood
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of
the instrument panel.
2. Move to the front of the vehicle.
3. Reach under the center front edge of the hood and push
and hold the safety catch lever to the left.
Hood Release Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
4. Lift the hood upward to the open position.
To Close The Hood
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
TRUNK
Opening
The trunk can be opened from inside the vehicle using the
power trunk button located on the instrument panel to the
left of the steering wheel.
The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by
pushing the trunk button on the key fob twice within five
seconds or by using the external release switch located on
the underside of the decklid overhang. The release feature
will function only when the vehicle is in the unlock
condition.
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the trunk open
symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating
that the trunk is open. The odometer display will reappear
once the trunk is closed.
Safety Catch Lever Location
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
With the ignition in the OFF position, the trunk open
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
NOTE: Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in
”Doors” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information on trunk operation with the Passive Entry
feature.
Opening From Inside The Vehicle
Interior Power Trunk Release
The trunk can be opened from inside the
vehicle using the power trunk release
button located on the instrument panel
to the left of the steering wheel.
NOTE: The transmission must be in
PARK before the button will operate.
Opening From Outside The Vehicle
To Unlock/Open The Trunk
The trunk may be unlocked/opened using either of the
following methods:
• Key Fob Trunk Release Button
• Passive Entry Button
Key Fob Trunk Release Button
Push the power trunk button on the key fob
twice within five seconds to release the trunk.
Passive Entry Button
Push the trunk passive entry button which is located on the
back of the trunk lid. With a valid Passive Entry key fob
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the trunk, push the passive entry
button to open the trunk.
Power Trunk
Release
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
Closing
With one or more hands placed on the outside trunk
surface push the trunk lid down until you hear the trunk
lock latch into place.
NOTE: Before closing the trunk lid make sure your key fob
isn’t inside the trunk area. The trunk will latch then
automatically unlock if the key fob is sensed not allowing
the key fob to be locked in the trunk area.
Trunk Safety
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency release
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-in-the-dark
handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in the
trunk, young children may not be able to escape, even
if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped in the
trunk, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Area Features
Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon
tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When the seats
are folded down, they provide a continuous, nearly-flat
extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stabil-
ity for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position)
should not be used as a play area by children when
the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
injured in a collision. Children should be seated and
using the proper restraint system.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle han-
dling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your ve-
hicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become
a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that
operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink
unit is powered by your vehicle’s battery.
The HomeLink buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different
HomeLink channels. The HomeLink indicator is located
above the center button.
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position, and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until the orange
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Overhead Console HomeLink Buttons
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufac-
tured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identi-
fied by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where
the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener.
NOTE: It is NOT the button that is normally used to open
and close the door. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate,
push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling
Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.⬙
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Press and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you press and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Non-
Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remain-
ing steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
the same manner.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door
or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button, while
you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held trans-
mitter every two seconds until HomeLink has success-
fully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Canadian/
Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Canadian/
Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the orange indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-
held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and re-
member to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
tures. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
tance.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
Console Features
There is an open cubby bin located forward of the gear
selector.
Two separate storage compartments are also located un-
derneath the center console armrest.
Inside the center console armrest, there is a removable
upper storage tray that can be slid forward/rearward on
rails for access to the lower storage area. This tray has an
integrated coin holder, along with additional area for small
items and handheld devices. Below the upper tray, the
lower storage compartment is made for larger items, like
tissue boxes. In addition, the 12 volt power outlet, USB and
Aux jack are located here.
Glove Compartment
Center Console
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a colli-
sion.
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas.
Upper Storage Tray
Front Door Trim Storage
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
Retractable Cover
Front Cupholders
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
If equipped, the rear seat cupholders are located in the
center armrest between the rear seats. The cupholders are
positioned forward in the armrest and side-by-side to
provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped
On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with a
light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
Control. Refer to “Interior Lights” in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Electrical Power Outlets
Your vehicle is equipped with one 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlet on the instrument panel and one 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlet in the center console that can be used to power
cellular phones, small electronics and other low powered
electrical accessories. The power outlets are labeled with either
a “key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is
powered. Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered
when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to
the battery and powered at all times.
Rear Seat Cupholders
Light Ring In Rear Cupholder
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area on
the center stack of the instrument panel.
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the
center console on vehicles not equipped with the ash
receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could
result.
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
Front Power Outlet
Center Console Power Outlet
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
NOTE: If the Media Hub is in use, do not exceed the
maximum power of 100 Watts (8 Amps) for the center
console power outlet. When the Media Hub is not in use,
the outlet can deliver up to 160 Watts (13 Amps). If the
power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
needs to be replaced.
NOTE: The instrument panel power outlet and dual rear
console USB ports can be changed to “battery” powered all
the time by moving the #12 20 Amp fuse from “IGN” to
“B+”. Refer to “Fuses” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
(Continued)
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #12 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Instrument Panel Power Outlet/Dual
USB Charge Only Ports
2 — #38 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Center Console Power Outlet/Media
Hub
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage.
Sunglasses Bin Door
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compart-
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome pad
on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the door to
close.
Sunglasses Bin Door
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..................118
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions ............121
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...........122
▫ Location And Controls ...................122
▫ Engine Oil Life Reset ....................124
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Menu Items ..........................125
▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If
Equipped ............................129
䡵 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .........131
▫ Red Warning Lights .....................131
▫ Yellow Warning Lights ...................135
▫ Yellow Indicator Lights ...................140
▫ Green Indicator Lights ...................140
▫ White Indicator Lights ...................141
▫ Blue Indicator Lights ....................142
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .142
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .........................142
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ..............143
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster For 3.6L Engine
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster For 5.7L Engine
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
Instrument Cluster For 6.4L Engine
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see “Servicing And Mainte-
nance.” Follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
NOTE: The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important informa-
tion about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a
driver interactive display located on the instrument panel,
your instrument cluster display can show you how sys-
tems are working and give you warnings when they are
not. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to
scroll through the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and make selec-
tions and adjustments.
Location And Controls
The instrument cluster display features an interactive
display which is located in the instrument cluster.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pushing the arrow buttons
located on the left side of the steering wheel. The instru-
ment cluster display menu items consist of the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Audio
Instrument Cluster Display
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Messages
• Screen Setup
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the up or down arrows allows you to cycle through
the Main Menu Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title area.
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the left or right arrow button allows you to cycle
through the submenu items of the Main menu item.
NOTE:
• Holding the up/down or left/right arrow button will
loop the user through the currently selected menu or
options presented on the screen.
• Main menu and submenus wrap for continuous scroll-
ing.
• Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu
screen viewed within that main menu will be displayed.
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer:
• Pushing the OK button changes units (mph or km/h).
For Screen Setup:
• OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus.
• Within each submenu layer, the up and down arrows
will allow the user to select the item of interest.
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
• Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a
confirmation screen will appear (returning the user to
the first page of the submenu).
• Pushing the left arrow button will exit each submenu
layer and return to the main menu.
Engine Oil Life Reset
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indi-
cator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indi-
cator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine
oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your
personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the OK
or arrow buttons. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display controls
for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button to access the
”Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life. If
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric display will
update to show 100%. If conditions are not met a popup
message of ⬙To reset oil life engine must be off with
ignition in run⬙ will be displayed (for five seconds), and
the user will remain at the Oil Life screen.
5. Push and release the up or down arrow button to exit
the submenu screen.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
speedometer menu is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the OK button to toggle units
(km/h or MPH) of the speedometer.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
“Vehicle Info” menu is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the right or left arrow button to
scroll through the submenus items of “Vehicle Info.” Fol-
low the directional prompts to access or reset any of the
following “Vehicle Info” submenu items:
• Tire Pressure Monitor
• Coolant Temp
• Trans Temp
• Oil Temp
• Oil Pressure
• Oil Life
• Battery Voltage
• AWD Status — If Equipped
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu displays the status of the ACC and
LaneSense systems.
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Driver Assist menu is displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC
system settings. The information displayed depends on
ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
displays in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the instrument
cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• Distance Setting Change
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating.”
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current Lane-
Sense system settings. The information displayed depends
on LaneSense system status and the conditions that need to
be met. For further information, refer to “LaneSense — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating.”
Fuel Economy
Two submenu pages; one with Current Value (instanta-
neous calculation of the fuel economy) displayed and one
without the Current Value displayed (toggle the left or
right arrow button to select one):
• Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L).
• Range To Empty (miles or km).
• Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L).
• The Max and Min values will correspond to the particu-
lar engine requirements.
• Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber color
and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.
• Hold the OK button to reset average fuel economy
information.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Trip Menu item is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Toggle the left or right arrow button to select Trip
A or Trip B. The Trip information will display the follow-
ing:
• Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
• Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG, L/100km or km/L) of Trip A or Trip B
since the last reset.
• Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel
since the last reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Audio
This menu displays the Audio information of the currently
playing audio source (e.g. FM radio).
Messages
This feature shows the number of stored warning mes-
sages, if any. Pushing the right or left arrow button will
allow you to scroll through the stored messages.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Screen Setup Menu displays in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the OK button to enter the
submenus. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as
well as the location that information is displayed.
1. Upper Left
• Compass (default)
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty (default)
• Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
• Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• None
2. Upper Right
• Compass
• Outside Temp (default)
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
• Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• None
3. Center
• Menu Title (default)
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
• Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Audio Information
• Digital Speed
• None
4. Current Gear
• On
• Off (default)
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Odometer
• Show (default)
• Hide
6. Gear Display
• Full (default)
• Single
7. Restore Defaults
• Ok
• Cancel
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state
of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate
that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
• The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery
Charge Warning Light” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be affected by load
reduction:
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
• Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• HVAC System
• 115V AC Power Inverter System
• Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads
are larger than the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electri-
cal accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar de-
vices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
• The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaners, game
consoles and similar devices.
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
During a trip:
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V,
115V AC, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (ad-
ditional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio sys-
tems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and
Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time
and parking time).
• The vehicle should have service performed if the mes-
sage is still present during consecutive trips and the
evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-
ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the infor-
mation contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you are
advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a failure indica-
tion. All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some tell-
tales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
— Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with
the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light
is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
— Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake functions, in-
cluding brake fluid level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that
there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is run-
ning, there may be a malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
— Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and
not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
— Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there’s a fault with
the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system. Refer to “Power
Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem
with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the
problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the
PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light
remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
NOTE: This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
— Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This warning light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this
indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If
the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous
chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool: whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine
oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact
an authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This
light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The
engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
— Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the engine oil
temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Wait for oil temperature to return to normal levels.
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger
seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the
light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Re-
minder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a high
transmission fluid temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly
faster, with the transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
— Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is open and
not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15
seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Yellow Warning Lights
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a
part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control sys-
tems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor
quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
several typical driving styles. In most situations, the ve-
hicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the Electronic Sta-
bility Control system is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light”
in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and
when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continu-
ously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this warning light remains
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed
to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recom-
mended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring.
In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption
may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
above, the display will show the indications corresponding
to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to your au-
thorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
— Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 gal (7.5 L), this
light will turn on and a chime will sound. The light will
remain on until fuel is added.
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not function-
ing and service is required as soon as possible. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
— Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the
Forward Collision Warning System. Contact your local
authorized dealer for service.
Refer to ⬙Forward Collision Warning (FCW)⬙ in ⬙Safety⬙ for
further information.
— Service AWD Warning Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All Wheel Drive
(AWD) system is not functioning properly and that service
is required. Contact your authorized dealer.
— LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the driver with visual and
steering torque warnings when the vehicle starts to drift
out of its lane unintentionally without the use of a turn
signal.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation,
the LaneSense indicator changes from solid green to
solid yellow.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
LaneSense indicator changes from solid white/green to
flashing yellow.
• Refer to “LaneSense – If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
— Service LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the LaneSense
system is not operating and requires service. Please see an
authorized dealer.
— Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and
needs service. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
Yellow Indicator Lights
— Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that Forward
Collision Warning is off.
Green Indicator Lights
— ECO Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when ECO Mode is active.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Vehicle Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and a target vehicle
is detected. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without
Target Vehicle Light — If Equipped
This will display the distance setting for the ACC system
when the system is engaged. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
— Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the speed control
is set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid green when
both lane markings have been detected and the system is
“armed” and ready to provide visual and torque warnings
if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or
headlights are turned on.
— Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is active.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn
signal indicator will flash independently and the corre-
sponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals
can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved
down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
White Indicator Lights
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) has been turned on, but is not set. Refer to “Adap-
tive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
— Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This indicator light will illuminate when the speed control
is ready, but not set.
— LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but not armed, the
LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid white. This
occurs when only left, right, or neither lane line has been
detected. If a single lane line is detected, the system is
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
ready to provide only visual warnings if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high
beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of
the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunc-
tion lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn
off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙
scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission
control systems. When these systems are operating prop-
erly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and
fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see
an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac-
cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Mul-
timedia”.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Main-
tenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is
not on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the follow-
ing:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the igni-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 SAFETY FEATURES ......................146
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............146
▫ Electronic Brake Control System (EBC) .......147
䡵 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS .............156
▫ Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . . .156
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation ....................163
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ......166
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........172
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features ........172
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............172
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................173
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ........183
▫ Child Restraints .......................197
▫ Transporting Pets ......................213
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ...........................213
▫ Transporting Passengers ..................213
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................214
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ...........................215
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ....................217
5
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most brak-
ing conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio trans-
mitting equipment. This interference can cause pos-
sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase brak-
ing or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
146 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifica-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake sys-
tem will continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warn-
ing Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as
possible.
Electronic Brake Control System (EBC)
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), and Rain Brake Support (RBS).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys-
tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
5
SAFETY 147
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay
on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is re-
quired. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come
on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
148 SAFETY
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the
available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve-
hicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by apply-
ing the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
5
SAFETY 149
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa-
bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
150 SAFETY
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS
is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
NOTE:
• For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a momen-
tary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Multiple
momentary button pushed may be required to return to
ESC On.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
• If Equipped — ⬙ESC Sport⬙ and ⬙ESC Track⬙ are ESC
partial off mode(s).
Full Off – If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only
and should not be used on any public roadways. In this
mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch for
five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF”
message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC
ON again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
WARNING!
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled. There-
fore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
system is unavailable. In an emergency evasive ma-
neuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in
maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is in-
tended for off-highway or off-road use only.
• With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 151
WARNING! (Continued)
Off” mode is only intended for off-highway or
off-road use.
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is turned to the ON mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be on even if it was turned off previously.
152 SAFETY
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Sta-
bility Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the
brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other ve-
hicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
5
SAFETY 153
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resum-
ing acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake
or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releas-
ing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also,
be certain to place the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster display,
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument cluster
display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
154 SAFETY
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within 20
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and then back to ON.
If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA
is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in
wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of
brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are
in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is active,
there is no notification to the driver and no driver interac-
tion is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach
full braking during emergency braking situations. It antici-
pates when an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver.
The EBC will prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS
and ESC are in a reduced mode.
5
SAFETY 155
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar
sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect
highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motor-
cycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
Rear Detection Zones
BSM Warning Light
156 SAFETY
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detec-
tion zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer
before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object
(i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side
of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light
remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a
forward gear.
• The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experi-
ence drop outs (blinking on and off) of the side mirror
Warning Indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any
small object remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple of sec-
onds).
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function prop-
erly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer
to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Sensor Location
5
SAFETY 157
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed
of less than 31 mph (50 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
158 SAFETY
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed of
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the
blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
5
SAFETY 159
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent
lanes.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists,
or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the
BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal
before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Stationary Objects
Opposing Traffic
160 SAFETY
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the
vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, includ-
ing reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
RCP Detection Zones
5
SAFETY 161
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the system
will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio volume is reduced so that the alert can
be better heard.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) volume will be reduced so
that the alert can be better heard.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced so that the alert can be better heard.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
162 SAFETY
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with miti-
gation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual
warnings (within the instrument cluster display), and may
apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited brak-
ing are intended to provide the driver with enough time to
react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors, as well as the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system, to calculate the probability of a forward
collision. When the system determines that a forward
collision is probable, the driver will be provided with
audible and visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk
warning. If the driver does not take action based upon
these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts
to the warnings by braking and the system determines that
the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has
not applied sufficient brake force, the system will compen-
sate and provide additional brake force as required. If a
Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event begins at
a speed below 20 mph (32 km/h), the system may provide
the maximum or partial braking to mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with
Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the system
will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then
release the brakes.
5
SAFETY 163
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the respon-
sibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warn-
ing could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW On Or Off
NOTE: The default status of FCW is on; this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
The Forward Collision activation/deactivation is located in
⬙Uconnect Settings⬙ under ⬙Safety And Driving Assistance⬙.
Forward Collision can be checked or unchecked.
FCW Message
164 SAFETY
When FCW is selected off, there will be an ⬙FCW OFF⬙ icon
that appears in the instrument cluster display.
Changing the FCW status to off prevents the system from
warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you.
NOTE: The FCW system’s default state is on. The FCW
system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to
the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will remain off
when the vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking settings are pro-
grammable through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
Active Braking is the “on” setting; this allows the system to
warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of
you when you are farther away and it applies limited
braking. This gives you the most reaction time to avoid a
possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you when you are much closer. This setting
provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting, which
allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “ACC/FCW Lim-
ited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality
Clean Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a
condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the
vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the condition that
limited the system performance is no longer present, the
system will return to its full performance state. If the
problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
5
SAFETY 165
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads:
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for infor-
mation on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The
tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this
is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
166 SAFETY
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase the
tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the TPMS Warning Light
will turn off once the system receives the updated tire
pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30
psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a tempera-
ture drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is suffi-
ciently low enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPMS Warning
Light will still be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning
Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed
for use on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to
a poor overall system performance or sensor damage.
Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to
assure proper TPM feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to your authorized dealer to have your sensor func-
tion checked.
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 167
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four tire pressure monitoring sensors
• Various tire pressure monitoring system messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
168 SAFETY
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warn-
ing Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster
and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In addition, the instru-
ment cluster will display an “Inflate to XX” message and a
graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the
low tire pressure values shown in a different color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those shown
in a different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the “Inflate to XX” message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update, the graphic display in the instru-
ment cluster will change color back to the original color,
and the TPMS Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
5
SAFETY 169
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
Service Tire Pressure System Warning
If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a ⬙Service Tire Pressure System⬙ message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not
being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer flash,
and the ⬙Service Tire Pressure System⬙ message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of
the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
• Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
• Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size does
not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore,
the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact
spare tire.
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
170 SAFETY
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below
the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition
key cycle, the TPMS Warning Light will remain on and
a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the
instrument cluster will still display a different color
pressure value and an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a “Service
Tire Pressure System” message for five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument
cluster will display a “Service Tire Pressure System”
message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare or
non-matching full size, the TPMS will update automati-
cally. In addition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can be deac-
tivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies (road
tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have
TPMS Sensors, such as when installing winter wheel and
tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with Tire
Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the ve-
hicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster
will display the “Service Tire Pressure System” message
and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “Service Tire Pressure System”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
5
SAFETY 171
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “Service
Tire Pressure System” message and then display pressure
values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the
⬙Service Tire Pressure System⬙ message will no longer be
displayed as long as no system fault exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
172 SAFETY
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) should be secured in the rear
seat of a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Cus-
tomer Assistance” section for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
5
SAFETY 173
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen-
ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuck-
led (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
174 SAFETY
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
led again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 175
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one an-
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
(Continued)
176 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
5
SAFETY 177
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
178 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
Adjustable Anchorage
5
SAFETY 179
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
180 SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg-
nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy
Management feature that may help further reduce the risk
of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has
a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in
a controlled manner.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
5
SAFETY 181
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
182 SAFETY
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
ing mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in-
crease the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
5
SAFETY 183
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso-
ciated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch
is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the
ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and
the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warn-
ing Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
184 SAFETY
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which
could affect the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redun-
dant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the
fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to
alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has
come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains
on while driving have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” section of this manual.
5
SAFETY 185
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag
covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
186 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 187
WARNING! (Continued)
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passen-
ger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of
the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping
to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
188 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are
marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on
the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
5
SAFETY 189
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
190 SAFETY
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are lo-
cated should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
particular impact event is appropriate, based on the sever-
ity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the
ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact
events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts,
the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
5
SAFETY 191
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side win-
dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly re-
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
192 SAFETY
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In
the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover
event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate,
the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE: The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
5
SAFETY 193
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem-
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem.
• Unlock the power door locks.
194 SAFETY
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
• Cut off battery power to the:
• Engine
• Electric Motor (if equipped)
• Electric power steering
• Brake booster
• Electric park brake
• Automatic transmission gear selector
• Horn
• Front wiper
• Headlamp washer pump
NOTE: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the
vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident,
reset the system by following the procedure described
below. If you have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
5
SAFETY 195
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an au-
thorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel-
erator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
196 SAFETY
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investi-
gation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
5
SAFETY 197
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–888–
327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-
childsafety-index-53.htm
198 SAFETY
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child Re-
straint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
ible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years
old or who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the vehi-
cle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child
Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have outgrown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
5
SAFETY 199
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and con-
vertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
200 SAFETY
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be-
cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve-
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be-
tween their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5
SAFETY 201
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
202 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating posi-
tions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
LATCH Label
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This
Vehicle
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
5
SAFETY 203
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of
the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage
system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the com-
bined weight of the child and the child restraint is
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor
instead of the LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing
or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH an-
chorages if allowed by the booster seat manufac-
turer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for
more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a com-
mon lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does not
have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the
seat belt to install a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back
of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact. See your child restraint own-
er’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Center position only may be removed.
204 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the
rear of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating
position located in the panel between the rear
seatback and the rear window. They are found
under a plastic cover with the tether anchorage
symbol on it.
LATCH Anchorages
Tether Strap Anchorages
5
SAFETY 205
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-
facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the
seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do
not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt,
do not install a child seat in that outboard position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “To Install A
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for typical instal-
lation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchor-
ages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
206 SAFETY
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
5
SAFETY 207
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under
“Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional information
on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
208 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
5
SAFETY 209
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is al-
lowed, if the child restraint manufac-
turer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Center Only may be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR retrac-
tor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
210 SAFETY
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 211
WARNING! (Continued)
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child re-
straint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover A — Tether Strap Hook
3 — Attaching Strap B — Tether Anchor
212 SAFETY
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Center Tether Attachment
1. Lower the adjustable center head restraint to the full
down position.
2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and head
restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
center tether anchorage located in the panel between the
rear seatback and the rear window.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
5
SAFETY 213
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
214 SAFETY
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air
Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the
fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have your authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of
the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelera-
tor, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
5
SAFETY 215
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using the
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasten-
ers on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
(Continued)
216 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are
suspected. The cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
5
SAFETY 217
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING THE ENGINE ..................222
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................222
▫ Normal Starting .......................223
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition .............224
▫ Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ..................225
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ..................225
▫ After Starting..........................225
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .225
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .226
䡵 PARKING BRAKE .......................227
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ..............230
▫ Ignition Park Interlock ...................231
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .231
▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission .........232
䡵 SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE
CONTROL ............................241
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L AND 6.4L
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED ....................242
䡵 POWER STEERING ......................242
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ..........243
▫ To Activate ...........................244
▫ To Set A Desired Speed ..................244
6
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ................244
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .................245
▫ To Resume Speed ......................246
▫ To Deactivate .........................246
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED ............................246
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation .....248
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .....249
▫ To Activate/Deactivate ...................249
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed ...............250
▫ To Cancel ............................251
▫ ToTurnOff...........................251
▫ To Resume ...........................251
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ................252
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC .......254
▫ Overtake Aid ..........................256
▫ ACC Operation At Stop ..................257
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu ........257
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance .........258
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC.........260
▫ General Information .....................264
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . . .264
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED ............................267
▫ ParkSense Sensors ......................267
▫ ParkSense Warning Display................267
▫ ParkSense Display ......................268
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........272
▫ Service The
ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .272
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System.............273
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions .........273
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ..............274
▫ LaneSense Operation ....................274
▫ Turning LaneSense On Or Off ..............275
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ LaneSense Warning Message ...............275
▫ Changing LaneSense Status ................278
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ........279
䡵 REFUELING THE VEHICLE ................281
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release ..........283
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING .....................283
▫ Vehicle Certification Label ................284
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ........284
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ..........284
▫ Overloading ..........................284
▫ Loading .............................285
䡵 TRAILER TOWING ......................285
▫ Common Towing Definitions...............286
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ................288
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) .......................289
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ...............289
▫ Towing Requirements ...................290
▫ Towing Tips ..........................294
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ....................295
䡵 DRIVING TIPS ..........................295
▫ Driving On Slippery Surfaces ..............295
▫ Driving Through Water ..................296
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in “OFF” mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the PARK position before you
can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into
any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
Normal Starting
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle.
If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short
pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition
will remain in the ACC mode until the gear selector is in
PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF mode.
If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once, the instrument
cluster will display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and
the engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle
out of the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE: If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button with the vehicle
speed below 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut
off, and the ignition will remain in the ACC position. The
system will automatically time out and the ignition will
cycle to the OFF mode after 30 minutes of inactivity if the
ignition is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running)
mode and the transmission is in PARK.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driv-
er’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN.
To change the ignition modes without starting the vehicle
and use the accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC mode.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN mode.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF mode.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Start/
Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is in the passenger
compartment.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that is
located near the air box.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
For vehicles equipped with the 3.6L or 5.7L use the
following engine break-in recommendations:
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant
installed at the factory is high-quality and energy-
conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be
consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under
which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended
viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Fluids And Lubri-
cants” in “Technical Specifications”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty. Please check your
oil level with the engine oil indicator often during the
break in period. Add oil as required.
For vehicles equipped with the 6.4L use the following
engine break-in recommendations:
Despite modern technology and World Class manufactur-
ing methods, the moving parts of the vehicle must still
wear in with each other. This wearing in occurs mainly
during the first 500 miles (805 km) and continues through
the first oil change interval.
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
It is recommended for the operator to observe the follow-
ing driving behaviors during the new vehicle break-in
period:
0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km):
• Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an
extended period of time.
• Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than
halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km):
• Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than
halfway to avoid rapid acceleration in lower gears (1st to
3rd gears).
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
• Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting manually
(paddles or gear shift) at higher rpms when possible.
• Do not perform sustained operation with the accelerator
pedal at wide open throttle.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
For the first 1500 miles (2414 km):
• Do not participate in track events, sport driving schools,
or similar activities during the first 1500 miles (2414 km).
NOTE: Check engine oil with every refueling and add if
necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher
through the first oil change interval.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park
brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time
and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the ON/RUN position, the Brake Warning Light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission
is placed in gear, the Brake Warning Light will flash. If
vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting
to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Parking Brake
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the park-
ing brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au-
thorized dealer immediately.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the ve-
hicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK posi-
tion is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
(Continued)
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the
driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
OFF mode.
NOTE: The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the
ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the engine will
be off). Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the
ignition is OFF (not in ACC mode) before exiting the
vehicle.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and
the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must
also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the ve-
hicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK posi-
tion is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
(Continued)
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both
on the gear selector and in the instrument cluster.
To select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear
selector and move the selector rearward or forward. To
shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed. You must
also press the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL into
DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or mov-
ing at low speeds. Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear (for
example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position
indicator will blink continuously until the selector is re-
turned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
Automatic Transmission Gear Selector
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL (Autostick) shift posi-
tions. Manual shifts can be made using the Autostick shift
control. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward
(+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (beside the
DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc, Refer to ⬙AutoStick⬙ in this
section for further information.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward)
it is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick, +/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position). In MANUAL (AutoStick)
mode, the transmission gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster (as M1, M2, M3, etc.). Move the gear selector to the
right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK,
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the ignition OFF.
• Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the ve-
hicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK posi-
tion is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
gear selector and firmly move the selector all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
• With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Op-
erating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control (if
equipped, refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions,
using a lower gear will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or be-
low), transmission operation may be modified depending
on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmis-
sion temperature has risen to a suitable level.
MANUAL (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE posi-
tion) enables full manual control of transmission shifting
(also known as AutoStick mode; refer to “AutoStick” in this
section for further information). Toggling the gear selector
forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
(AutoStick) position will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab-
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle
performance may be severely degraded and the engine
may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not
re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A
message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of
the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may
be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired loca-
tion (preferably, at an authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift
the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns
OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature pro-
viding manual shift control, giving you more control of the
vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and im-
prove overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more control during
passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain
driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
Operation
When the gear selector is in the DRIVE (D) position, the
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
the eight available gears. To activate AutoStick, move the
gear selector into the MANUAL (M) position (beside the
DRIVE position). The current transmission gear will be
displayed in the instrument cluster, along with a high-
lighted ⬙M⬙ (Manual) indication. When the gear selector is
in the MANUAL (M) position, tap the gear selector for-
ward (-) (or tap the (-) shift paddle on the steering wheel,
if equipped) to downshift the transmission to the next
lower gear, or tap the lever rearward (+) (or tap the (+) shift
paddle, if equipped) to command an upshift.
Paddle Shifters
1 — Shift Paddle Downshift
2 — Shift Paddle Upshift
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
NOTE:
• Tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift
paddles (+/-), if equipped, while the gear selector is in
DRIVE, will activate a temporary AutoStick mode. Tap-
ping (-) to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the
transmission to the next lower gear, while tapping (+) to
enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear. The
current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster,
but the ⬙M⬙ will not be highlighted. The transmission
will revert back to normal operation (if the gear selector
remains in DRIVE) after a period of time, depending on
accelerator pedal activity.
• In some models, the shift paddles may be disabled (or
re-enabled, as desired) using the Drive Mode Set-Up,
accessed by selecting Performance Control from the
Apps menu in the Uconnect screen.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down
when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver (using the
gear selector, or the shift paddles [if equipped]), unless an
engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will
remain in the selected gear until another upshift or down-
shift is chosen, except as described below.
• In temporary AutoStick mode (gear selector in DRIVE),
the transmission will automatically shift up when maxi-
mum engine speed is reached. If the accelerator is fully
depressed, the transmission will downshift when pos-
sible (based on current vehicle speed and gear, except
6.4L models). Lack of accelerator pedal activity will
cause the transmission to revert to automatic operation.
•
If normal AutoStick mode is engaged (gear selector in
MANUAL position), manual gear selection will be main-
tained until the gear selector is returned to DRIVE, or as
described below. The transmission will not upshift auto-
matically at redline in this mode, nor will downshifts be
obtained if the accelerator pedal is pressed to the floor.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second gear.
Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or
icy conditions.
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed (if equipped), or
holding the gear selector in the (-) position, will down-
shift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the
current speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault
or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift paddle
(if equipped, and the gear selector is already in DRIVE)
until “D” is once again indicated in the instrument cluster.
You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE
CONTROL
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature. This
mode is a configuration set up for typical enthusiast
driving. The engine, transmission, and steering systems are
all set to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will provide
improved throttle response and modified shifting for an
enhanced driving experience, as well the greatest amount
of steering feel. This mode may be activated and deacti-
vated by pushing the Sport button on the instrument panel
switch bank.
For vehicles equipped with Drive Modes or a “SUPER
TRACK PACK” button, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L AND 6.4L ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off
four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load and
cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver
inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light
efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it
from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer
the vehicle manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to ”Customer Pro-
grammable Features” within “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” for further information.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is
displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEER-
ING” or the “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF –
SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed within
the instrument cluster display, this indicates the vehicle
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to
“Warning Lights And Messages” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER STEER-
ING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed on the
instrument cluster screen, they indicate that extreme steer-
ing maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over
temperature condition in the power steering system. Once
driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle
idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn off.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the
desired vehicle set speed.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — On/Off 4 — SET (-)/Decel
2 — SET (+)/Accel 5 — CANC/Cancel
3 — RES/Resume
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control.
“CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is on. To
turn the system off, push the on/off button a second time.
“CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate
at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set, a message
“CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)” will appear
indicating what speed was set. A cruise indicator lamp,
along with set speed will also appear and stay on in the
instrument cluster when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument cluster display. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed incre-
ment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument cluster display. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed decre-
ment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed
from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition switch
OFF erases the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving con-
venience provided by cruise control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed
Control function performs differently. Please refer to the
proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to
reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly
ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC
will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an ap-
propriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in
this section.
NOTE: Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react
to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently. Al-
ways confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather condi-
tions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions
into account, and may be limited upon adverse
sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for
2 seconds in the stop position. If the target vehicle
does not start moving within two seconds the ACC
system will display a message that the system will
release the brakes and that the brakes must be
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
WARNING! (Continued)
applied manually. An audible chime will sound
when the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The Speed Control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control On/Off
5 — Distance Setting Increase
2 — SET(+)/Accel 6 — Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) On/Off
3 — RES/Resume 7 — Distance Setting Decrease
4 — SET (-)/Decel 8 — CANC/Cancel
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster displays
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following con-
ditions:
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL.
• When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the driver’s door is open at low speeds.
• When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
displays “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster displays
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The instrument
cluster display will display the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph
(32 km/h). If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in
front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not,
the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the
instrument cluster display.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed
will only be determined by the position of the accelera-
tor pedal.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC button is pushed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
NOTE: If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than
two seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply the
brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory
if:
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The instrument cluster display will display the last
set speed.
NOTE: ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that
is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
WARNING! (Continued)
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed incre-
ment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed decre-
ment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET
(-) buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
• When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle
will release the vehicle brakes two seconds after coming
to a full stop.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill.
This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting —
Increase button and release. Each time the button is pushed,
the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting —
Decrease button and release. Each time the button is pushed,
the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set
speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same
lane, the instrument cluster displays the “Sensed Vehicle
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium) Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless
of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain
the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action and does
not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the
ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes
the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
Brake Alert
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while
following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A
cancel message will display on the instrument cluster
display and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention
will be required at this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a stand-
still, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is
opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the
brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the
instrument cluster display and produce a warning chime.
Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects
in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The instrument cluster display is located
in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
appears in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the
steering wheel) is pushed, the display will read “ACC
SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument
cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
display “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sen-
sor” and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer to
“Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor
lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the
sensor lens.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunc-
tion.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sen-
sor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your
authorized dealer.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermar-
ket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended.
Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW
operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” warning will display and also a chime will indicate
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of
glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded perfor-
mance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/
FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an
internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporar-
ily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly.
The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset
from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from
a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of
the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stabil-
ity reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the
vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your
original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turn Or Bend Example
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it
may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it
is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing Example
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the
lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have
moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the
vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising
at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without
requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise
Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes, push the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns
the ACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off.
Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode, the
system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the
proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will
sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead
since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is se-
lected.
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on. When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle
will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been
set a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)”
will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will
turn on when the system is turned on via the on/off
control. It turns green when the cruise control is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument cluster display. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed incre-
ment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument cluster display. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed decre-
ment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC button is pushed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory
if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” in this section for limitations of this system
and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper,
monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’
field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approxi-
mately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the
location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected from the Customer -
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru-
ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indi-
cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, and an obstacle has been
detected, the warning display will turn on indicating the
system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region
and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the sound tone will change from fast to
continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis-
tance
(in/cm)
Greater
than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2-
Second
Tone
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Fast
(for rear
center only)
Fast Continuous
Arc — Left
Rear
None None None None None 2nd
Flashing
1st Flashing
Arc —
Center Rear
None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
1st Flashing
Arc — Right
Rear
None None None None None 2nd
Flashing
1st Flashing
Radio
Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
the system, the instrument cluster will display
the “ParkSense Off” message for approximately
five seconds. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument
cluster display will display the “ParkSense Off” message
for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or defective. The ParkSense switch LED will be off
when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed and the system is disabled or requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily and then the
LED will be on.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instru-
ment cluster display will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE UN-
AVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display”. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will show the
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ mes-
sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this
condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
appears in the instrument cluster display, make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruc-
tion and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the instrument cluster display, see an autho-
rized dealer.
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In
washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor
jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm)
from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense or render the sys-
tem temporarily unavailable.
• When you turn ParkSense off in DRIVE, the instrument
cluster will display ⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙ for five seconds.
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” mes-
sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio when it is
sounding an audio tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Ensure the ParkSense system is off if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within 12
inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be
shown in the instrument cluster display.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to detect
lane markings and measure vehicle position within the
lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning
in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If
the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the lane,
the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through
the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides visual
warnings through the instrument cluster display to prompt
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not
be provided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on
the steering wheel and provides an audible warning to the
driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on the
steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does
not return their hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The default status of LaneSense is off.
The LaneSense button is located on the center stack below
the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the Lane-
Sense button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense On”
message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button once (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state, on or off, from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the instrument cluster display.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display Screen — If
Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale
is solid white when only the left lane marking has been
detected and the system is ready to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display if an unin-
tentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line
remains solid yellow and the LaneSense telltale changes
from solid white to flashing yellow.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale is
solid green when both lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in
the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure
occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation,
the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid yellow.
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green to solid
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example, if approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin
line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque
is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction
of the lane boundary.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
• For example, if approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system settings can be configured through
the Uconnect system screen.
Follow these steps to change the LaneSense settings:
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the
Uconnect touchscreen display.
2. Press the “Settings” button.
3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button.
When in the Safety & Driving Assistance screen, you can
configure the intensity of the torque warning and the
warning zone sensitivity (early/late) through the person-
alization settings.
NOTE:
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control, for-
ward collision warning, etc.)
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the
rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The ParkView camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license
plate. The image will be displayed in the touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire sur-
roundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds,
this note will disappear.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
mable modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature
and it is turned on, the rear camera image will be displayed
for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE. However, this feature is canceled if the forward
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
shifted into PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to OFF, or
by pressing the image defeat [X] button.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera
Delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the
last touchscreen appears again.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position. The
active guide lines will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are re-
sponsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located in the
driver’s door map pocket).
2. Open the fuel filler door.
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel
door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door
using the inside release button. Do not pry on the door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the pipe
seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel-
ing.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
Fuel Filler Door
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle “clicks”
or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Maintain nozzle in filler for 5 seconds to allow nozzle to
drain.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for
emergency refueling with a gas can.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
Fuel Funnel
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release located in the trunk.
Follow the steps below to open the fuel door in case of an
emergency:
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the access cover (located on the left side inner
trim panel).
3. Pull the release cable.
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the
“Vehicle Certification Label”. This information should be
used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Access Cover
Release Cable
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the
drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of vehicle
• Month, Day, and Hour of manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load
must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is impor-
tant that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear
GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if
either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels,
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and
rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle
is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it
is not over the GVWR.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on
the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the
brakes operate.
NOTE:
• Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the
rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and
GAWRs.
• Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle’s proper tire
pressure.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or tempo-
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction
associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addi-
tion of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the
maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt.
3.6L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
5.7L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Trailer towing with the 6.4L engine is not recommended.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
pension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
(Continued)
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard.
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled Servic-
ing”. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper maintenance intervals. When
towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer
is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing
while using a full size spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire
inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper tire replacement proce-
dures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capac-
ity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible per-
sonal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have a collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur
while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control to
manually select a lower gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
AutoStick
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the high-
est gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3”
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary
to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheat-
ing, take the following actions:
City Driving
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
• Reduce speed.
• Temporarily turn off air conditioning.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME,
ETC.)
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or
using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only accept-
able method for towing this vehicle (behind another ve-
hicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the
ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DRIVING TIPS
Driving On Slippery Surfaces
Information in this section will aid in safe controlled
launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
difference in the surface traction under the front (driving)
wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and care-
fully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions
should be observed:
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
• Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip Differ-
ential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the
amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved
handling.
Driving Through Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and pre-
vent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path’s surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further-
more, flowing and/or rising water can carry your ve-
hicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
(Continued)
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shal-
low standing water, consider the following Cautions and
Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping dis-
tances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in inju-
ries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always in-
spect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis-
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ............301
䡵 ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED . . . .301
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ....................307
▫ Replacement Bulbs .....................307
▫ Replacing Exterior Bulbs ..................309
䡵 FUSES ................................311
▫ General Information .....................312
▫ Underhood Fuses ......................312
▫ Rear Interior Fuses .....................317
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...........323
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ...........324
▫ Preparations For Jacking .................325
▫ Jacking And Changing A Tire ..............326
▫ Road Tire Installation ...................330
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ..........330
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage...................331
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . . .331
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions ..........332
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit .........334
䡵 JUMP STARTING ........................338
▫ Preparations For Jump Start ...............339
▫ Jump Starting Procedure .................340
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .............342
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION ........................343
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............345
7
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the switch
bank just above the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the
switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may discharge the battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
SOS button.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and as-
sume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect and
(Continued)
Assist And SOS Mirror
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 301
WARNING! (Continued)
SiriusXM Guardian features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be
operable if your SiriusXM Guardian service is active and
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to
someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for SiriusXM Guardian.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there
will be a ten second delay before the SOS Call system
initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call
connection, push the SOS call button on the Rearview
Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device
Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green
LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a SOS operator has been made.
302 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the
following important vehicle information to a SOS op-
erator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if addi-
tional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and as-
sume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s SOS
Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
the SOS operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator should be able
to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
system will attempt to remain connected with the SOS
operator until the SOS operator terminates the connec-
tion.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with impor-
tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 303
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should exit
the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operable network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception
is required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electri-
cal system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF
YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL
NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is de-
tected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
304 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or ob-
structed.
• Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility.
• Operator error by the SOS operator.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and as-
sume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian features and applications in this
(Continued)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 305
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection and a GPS signal is required
for the SOS Call system to function properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
306 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 562
Overhead Console Reading Lamp 578
Visor Vanity Lamps A6220
Glove Compartment Lamp – If Equipped 194
Door Courtesy 562
Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140
Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cup Holder LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 307
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low/High Beam Headlamp (Standard Halogen Bi Func-
tion Projector)
9005SL+
Low/High Beam Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge
(Premium HID Bi Function Projector)
D3S (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Park/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamp – If Equipped LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Side Marker LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Stop/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Side Marker LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
License LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
308 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Front Low/High Beam Headlamp And Park/Turn
Lamp — Models With Halogen Headlamps
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assem-
bly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Remove the large dust cap from the headlamp housing
by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise, and remove.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
5. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head-
lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
6. Reinstall the dust cap.
Front Low/High Beam Headlamp And Park/Turn
Lamp — Models With High Intensity Discharge
Headlamps (HID)
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of this,
you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocu-
tion if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when
the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the
lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 309
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The Side Markers must be replaced as an
assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Front Fog Lamp
The Front Fog Lamps use LED sources that are not
serviceable separately. The Front Fog Lamp must be re-
placed as an assembly; see your authorized dealer.
Front Turn Signal Lamps
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assem-
bly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the turn
signal (inboard) bulb cap.
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to
unlock it.
4. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and
pull straight out from the lamp assembly.
Headlamp Assembly Location
Headlamp Assembly
310 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring connector and
install the replacement bulb.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly straight into the
lamp until it locks in place.
7. Install the turn signal bulb cap in the headlamp housing
and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
Backup Lamps
The Backup Lamps use LED sources that are not service-
able separately. The Applique must be replaced as an
assembly; see your authorized dealer.
License Lamp
The License Lamp uses an LED source that is not service-
able separately. The License Lamp must be replaced as an
assembly; see your authorized dealer.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL Lamp uses LED sources that are not service-
able separately. The CHMSL Lamp must be replaced as an
assembly; see your authorized dealer.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice
versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 311
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive cur-
rent.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
Underhood Fuses
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions are printed on
the inside of the power distribution center cover.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element.
3 — Blade fuse with a NOT functional / BAD fuse element (blown
fuse).
312 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
1 – – Fuse – Spare
2 40 Amp Green – Radiator Fan #1 – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
3 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #1 – If Equipped
4 30 Amp Pink – Starter
5 40 Amp Green – Anti Lock Brake
Front Power Distribution Center
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 313
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
6 30 Amp Pink – Anti Lock Brake
7 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC #1
8 50 Amp Red / 20
Amp Blue
– Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) / Police
Ignition Run / ACC # 2
9 – 20 Amp Yellow All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
10 – 10 Amp Red Intrusion MOD (300) – If Equipped / Under
Hood Lamp – Police
11 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns
12 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
13 – – Fuse – Spare
14 – – Fuse – Spare
15 – 20 Amp Yellow Left HID – If Equipped
16 – 20 Amp Yellow Right HID – If Equipped
18 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
19 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #2 – If Equipped
20 30 Amp Pink – Wiper Motor
21 30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Po-
lice
– Headlamp Washers – If Equipped
Police Bat Feed #2
314 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
22 40 Amp Green / 20
Amp Blue – Police
– Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L Supercharged) /
Police Bat Feed # 3
23 20 Amp Blue – Police Bat Feed # 1
24 50 Amp Red / 20
Amp Blue
– Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) / Police
Ignition Run/ACC Feed # 3
28 – – Fuse – Spare
29 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module (Challenger/
Charger Police) / Electronic Shift Module
(Challenger)
30 – – Fuse – Spare
31 – 25 Amp Clear Engine Module
32 – – Fuse – Spare
33 – – Fuse – Spare
34 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain #1
35 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain #2
36 – 10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake Module
37 – 10 Amp Red Engine Controller / Rad Fan Relays
(Charger/300) / Electric Power Steering Mod-
ule (Charger/300) / 5-Speed TCM
38 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 315
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
39 – 10 Amp Red EPS (Challenger) / EHPS (Police) / AC
Clutch Relay / Vacuum Pump Relay / Rad
Fan Relays (Challenger)
48 – 10 Amp Red AWD Module/Front Axle Disconnect – If
Equipped
49 – – Fuse – Spare
50 – – Fuse – Spare
51 – 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump
52 – 5 Amp Tan Adaptive Cruise – If Equipped
53 – – Fuse – Spare
316 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Interior Fuses
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center con-
tains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and descrip-
tions are printed on the inside of the power distribution
center cover.
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
(Continued)
Opening The Access Cover
Rear Power Distribution Center
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 317
CAUTION! (Continued)
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
2 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #1
3 – – Fuse – Spare
4 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #2
5 30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
– Sunroof/Dome Lamp –
Police
6 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #1
7 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #2
8 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lighting
9 40 Amp Green – Power Locks
10 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Control Mod-
ule
11 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Control
Module
318 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
12 – 20 Amp Yellow Dual USB Center Console
Rear/Cigar Lighter IP – If
Equipped
15 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower
16 20 Amp Blue – Left Spot Lamp – Police
17 20 Amp Blue – Right Spot Lamp – Police
18 30 Amp Pink – Mod Network Interface –
Police
19 – – Fuse – Spare
20 – – Fuse – Spare
21 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump (Non 6.2L SRT
Demon)
22 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Gateway Mod
23 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door/Diagnostic Port
24 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Center Stack
25 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor
26 – 15 Amp Blue Cygnus Transmission
Module (Charger/300) /
Electronic Shift Module
(Charger/300)
27 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier – If Equipped
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 319
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
31 – 25 Amp Breaker Power Seats – If Equipped
32 – 15 Amp Blue HVAC Module/Cluster
33 – 15 Amp Blue Ignition Switch/RF Hub
Module/Steering Column
Lock (300) – If Equipped
34 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Module/
Clock (300)
35 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
36 – 15 Amp Blue Electronic Exhaust Valve –
If Equipped
37 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio
38 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm
Rest/Console Media Hub
40 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump (6.2L SRT De-
mon – If Equipped)
41 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump (6.2L SRT De-
mon – If Equipped)
42 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defrost
320 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
43 – 20 Amp Yellow Comfort Seat And Steering
Wheel Module (Heated
Steering Wheel/RR
Heated Seats)
44 – 10 Amp Red Park Assist / Blind Spot /
Rear View Camera
45 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster / Rearview Mirror
/ Compass (Charger/300)
/ Humidity Sensor / For-
ward Facing Camera (Lane
Departure) / Cyber Gate-
way
46 – – Fuse – Spare
47 – 10 Amp Red Adaptive Front Lighting /
Day Time Running Lamps
– If Equipped
48 – 20 Amp Yellow Active Suspension – (6.4L
/ 6.2L)
49 – – Fuse – Spare
50 – – Fuse – Spare
51 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated / Vented
Seats – If Equipped
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 321
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
52 – 10 Amp Red Heated Cupholders/Rear
Heated Seat Switches – If
Equipped
53 – 10 Amp Red HVAC Module/In Vehicle
Temperature Sensor
54 – – Fuse – Spare
55 – – Fuse – Spare
56 – – Fuse – Spare
57 – – Fuse – Spare
58 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
59 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals – Police
60 – – Fuse – Spare
61 – – Fuse – Spare
62 – – Fuse – Spare
63 – – Fuse – Spare
64 – 25 Amp Breaker Rear Windows (Charger/
300)
65 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
66 – – Fuse – Spare
322 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
67 – 10 Amp Red Rain and Light Sensor /
Sunroof / Inside RR View
Mirror / Police Run Acc
Relay
68 – 10 Amp Red Dual USB Power Outlet –
R/A Sense (Charger/300)
Rear Sunshade (Charger/
300) RR USB Timer
69 – – Fuse – Spare
70 – – Fuse – Spare
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 323
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack and
spare tire.
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to access
the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
3. Rotate the fastener securing the spare tire counterclock-
wise to remove it.
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Rotate the fastener securing the jack counterclockwise to
remove it.
Opening The Access Panel
Spare Tire Fastener
324 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Remove the wheel chocks, jack and lug wrench assem-
bly from under the spare tire. Turn the jack screw to the
left to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench
from the jack assembly.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn off the ignition.
Jack Fastener
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 325
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position using the provided
wheel chocks. For example, if changing the right front
tire, chock the left rear wheel. Place both chocks under
the tire.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in
the vehicle when the vehicle is being
jacked.
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
326 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, wheel chocks, and lug
wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap
covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the center
cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to loosen,
but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat
tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while
the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.
NOTE: If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide the
jack on its side and rotate it up into position.
Jack Warning Label
Jacking Locations
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 327
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and
install the spare tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location
328 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Tires—General Information” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for additional warnings, cautions,
and information about the spare tire, its use, and
operation.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
Mounting Spare Tire
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 329
each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque
Specifications” in “Technical Specifications” for proper
lug nut torque.
11. Stow the wheel chocks, jack, tools and flat tire. Make
sure the base of the jack faces the front of the vehicle
before tightening down the fastener.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for proper lug nut torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can
be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
330 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Location
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on the
bottom side of the Tire Service
Kit)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 331
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the Black
Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to
inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when
selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn
on the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power Button
(4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing A
Tire With Tire Service Kit” section (F) “Sealant Bottle
And Hose Replacement”.
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire
application use and need to be replaced after each use.
Always replace these components immediately at your
original equipment vehicle dealer.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
332 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on
the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump
Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in
the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid inject-
ing sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only
intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your tire.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service
Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
(Continued)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 333
WARNING! (Continued)
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty
of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do
not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immedi-
ately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in
Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition in the
OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Sealant
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the
fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the valve
stem.
334 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the park-
ing brake engaged and the gear selector in NEUTRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position and not
Air Mode. Push the Power Button (4) to turn On the Tire
Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the
Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and the
pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump
Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant
Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through the hose (typically takes 30 - 70 sec-
onds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6),
the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8
Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 335
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button (2) to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument
panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting
your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can
also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service
Kit components which may cause permanent damage
to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or ten minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
336 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have
the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
To Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw
the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the
vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 337
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to “(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Bottle
(1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of it
accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that
the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the front
of the housing. Push the bottle into the housing. An
audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked
into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage
area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump
starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
338 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
engine compartment for jump starting.
NOTE: The remote battery posts are viewed by standing
on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender.
Jump Starting Locations
(+) — Remote Positive Post
(-) — Remote Negative Post
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 339
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmis-
sion into PARK and place the ignition in the OFF
position.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach, apply the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
340 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 341
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
342 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT
(H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking
brake before activating the Manual Park Release. In
addition, you should be seated in the driver’s seat with
your foot firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park Release
will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake, or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an unse-
cured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for
those in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmis-
sion will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a
Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the console storage bin.
3. Remove the plastic cover under the bin by using the slot
provided to access the Manual Park Release lever.
4. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the tether
strap up through the opening in the console base.
Console Storage Bin
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 343
5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
6. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the
lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing it
to the right.
7. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged posi-
tion, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and
rearward, until it locks in place in the vertical position.
The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be moved.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side)
rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
down, to its original position, until the locking tab snaps
into place to secure the lever.
Locking Tab
Tether Strap
344 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
Reinstall the Manual Park Release cover and the console
storage bin.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE
while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount
of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
• Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
• Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control System” in “Safety” for further information.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙
switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 345
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro-
longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
346 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground RWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is
operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max
speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max
distance
NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Front NOT RECOMMENDED
(but, if used, same
limitations as above)
NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT RECOMMENDED NOT RECOMMENDED,
but, if used:
• Ignition in ON/RUN
mode
• Transmission in NEU-
TRAL (NOT in PARK)
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 347
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is man-
datory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to ⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the transmission and driveline are operable, AWD mod-
els can also be towed with the ignition in the ON/RUN
mode, the transmission in NEUTRAL (not in PARK!), and
the rear wheels OFF the ground with no limitation on
speed or distance. Since the ignition MUST be in the
ON/RUN mode to tow in this manner, AWD vehicles must
be towed with ALL FOUR wheels OFF the ground (e.g. on
a flatbed truck) if the key fob is unavailable.
348 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
• Towing this vehicle using any other method can
cause severe transmission and/or transfer case dam-
age.
• Damage from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
is operable, this vehicle may be flat towed (with all four
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The automatic transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
Refer to ⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section for instruc-
tions on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL when
the engine is off.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles
(48 km), then the only acceptable method of towing is with a
flatbed truck.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Enhanced Accident Re-
sponse System (EARS) function.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 349
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed under certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
350 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SCHEDULED SERVICING .................353
▫ 3.6L And 5.7L Engines ...................353
▫ 6.4L Engine ..........................357
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................362
▫ 3.6L Engine ..........................362
▫ 5.7L Engine ..........................363
▫ 6.4L Engine ..........................364
▫ Checking Oil Level — 3.6L And 5.7L Engine . . .365
▫ Checking Oil Level — 6.4L Engine...........365
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ...................366
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .................366
䡵 DEALER SERVICE .......................367
▫ Engine Oil ...........................368
▫ Engine Oil Filter .......................371
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter .................371
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ..............371
▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ............374
▫ Body Lubrication ......................375
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades .................376
▫ Exhaust System ........................379
▫ Cooling System ........................380
▫ Brake System .........................385
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................387
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped .......388
▫ Rear Axle ............................388
䡵 RAISING THE VEHICLE ..................388
8
䡵 TIRES ................................389
▫ Tire Safety Information ..................389
▫ Tires — General Information ..............399
▫ Tire Types ............................405
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ................406
▫ Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ..............409
▫ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) .............410
▫ Tire Rotation Recommendations.............411
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..........411
▫ Treadwear ............................412
▫ Traction Grades ........................412
▫ Temperature Grades .....................412
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE .....................413
䡵 BODYWORK ...........................413
▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents ........413
▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........414
▫ Preserving The Bodywork .................414
䡵 INTERIORS ............................415
▫ Seats And Fabric Parts ...................415
▫ Plastic And Coated Parts..................416
▫ Leather Parts ..........................417
▫ Glass Surfaces .........................417
352 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
3.6L And 5.7L Engines
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence
when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message
is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (800 km).
The “Oil Change Required” message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and
off-road environment, or is operated predominantly at idle
or only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 353
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering (if equipped) and
fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Maintenance Plan — 3.6L And 5.7L
Required Maintenance Intervals:
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page
for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it
occurs before your next scheduled service
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and
park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
354 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals,
and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid
(All Wheel Drive Only).
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Adjust park brake on vehicles equipped with four
wheel disc brakes.
XXX X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only). X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs. ** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
XX
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 355
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change the transfer case fluid; if using your vehicle
for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or
frequent trailer towing. (All Wheel Drive Only).
XX
Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped
with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the front axle
fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: po-
lice, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
XX X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
356 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominately at idle or
only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
6.4L Engine
The scheduled maintenance services listed in this manual
must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect
your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle perfor-
mance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be
needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions, such as
dusty areas and very short trip driving. Inspection and
service should also be done anytime a malfunction is
suspected.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
A “Oil Change Required” message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster and a single chime will sound, indicat-
ing that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (800 km).
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 357
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s oil
if it has been six months since your last oil change, even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road/track usage for an extended period of
time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichever
comes first.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
an authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring
to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
At Each Stop For Fuel
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in this chapter for further information.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if re-
quired.
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and add as needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
358 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Maintenance Plan — 6.4L
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X X X X XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of ir-
regular wear, even if it occurs before sched-
uled maintenance.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and
boot seals, for cracks or leaks and all parts
for damage, wear, improper looseness or
end play; replace if necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 359
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
If using your vehicle for any of the following:
dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the en-
gine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect the brake linings; replace if neces-
sary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X X XXXX
Inspect the exhaust system. X X X X X X X X X X X
Adjust the parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
XXX X X
Inspect the manual transmission fluid (If
Equipped).
XXXXXXXX
Inspect the rear axle fluid. X X X X X X X X
Change the manual transmission fluid (if
equipped).
XX X
Change the rear axle fluid if using your ve-
hicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet or frequent trailer towing.
XX X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X X XXXX
Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if neces-
sary.
X
360 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Replace the spark plugs.** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120
months if not done at 150,000 miles
(240,000 km).
XX
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 361
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L Engine
1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
362 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5.7L Engine
1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 363
6.4L Engine
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
2 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
4 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post) 9 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Engine Oil Dipstick
364 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Checking Oil Level — 3.6L And 5.7L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every month. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are three possible dipstick types,
• Crosshatched zone.
• Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
• Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
NOTE: Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the reading is at the
low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
Checking Oil Level — 6.4L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as once a month. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the
oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 quart (1 liter) of
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range on
these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 365
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades
clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters) of
washer fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid”
appears in the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
nance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the
trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine
compartment for jump starting. Refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further infor-
mation.
Battery Location
366 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your ve-
hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 367
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil — 3.6L And 5.7L Engine
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Change Engine Oil — 6.4L Engine
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, which-
ever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection — 3.6L And 5.7L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec-
ommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil Selection — 6.4L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec-
ommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN.
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic
SAE 0W-40 engine oil or equivalent meeting the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS-12633.
368 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Pe-
troleum Institute (API). The manu-
facturer only recommends API Cer-
tified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine
oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix Ultra or
equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures.
This engine oil improves low temperature starting and
vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compart-
ment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix
Ultra or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine
oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 5.7L Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix Ultra or
equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures.
This engine oil improves low temperature starting and
vehicle fuel economy.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 369
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compart-
ment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use SAE
5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper opera-
tion of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel Saver
Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 6.4L Engine
Use Pennzoil Ultra Platinum 0W-40 engine or equivalent
Mopar oil meeting the FCA Material Standard MS-12633
for use in all operating temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in this section for further information.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station
or governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
370 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters
and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the ve-
hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 371
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-
proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-
mable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap-
proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the sys-
tem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, for further warranty
information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant un-
der high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condition-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer or other service facili-
ties using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recom-
mends that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
372 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side
of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When install-
ing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
3. Remove the used filter.
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the direc-
tion of airflow, which is toward the rear of the vehicle
(text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
Access Door
Filter Access Cover
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 373
5. Close the filter access cover.
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
A/C Air Filter
374 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Conditions that would require replacement:
• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
• Rib or belt wear
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
• Belt slips
• “Groove jumping⬙ (belt does not maintain correct posi-
tion on pulley)
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard
or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such
as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected
for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica-
tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 375
proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
376 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
up the locking tab.
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away from the arm
and use one finger push the release tab toward the
wiper arm.
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the
wiper arm.
Windshield Wiper Arm
1—Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3—WiperArm
Wiper Locking Assembly
1—Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3—WiperArm
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 377
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the
wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade
down toward the base of the wiper arm and away from
the J hook in the end of the wiper arm).
6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is
in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the tip of the
wiper arm with the wiper locking tab open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper assembly into
the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in
the wiper blade under the locking tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm
until it is latched (engagement will be accompanied by
an audible click). Fold down the latch release tab and
snap it into its locked position.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
1—Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
378 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 379
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when
the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
NOTE: Your vehicle’s exhaust system may be equipped
with an Electronic Exhaust Valve (EEV) system, if the
exhaust system is replaced with aftermarket products a
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will illuminate.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the
OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
380 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer.
Check the front of the radiator for any accumulation of
bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water
from a garden hose vertically down the face of the con-
denser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO
NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN
THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 381
NOTE:
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not
be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-
tors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propyl-
ene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of
propylene glycolbased engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
382 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for
assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as pos-
sible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 383
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regu-
lated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open contain-
ers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point
or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
384 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro-
tection of your engine which contains aluminum com-
ponents.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if
the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when perform-
ing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 385
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements
described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes,
fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a
checkup may be needed.
Use only brake fluid that has been recommended by the
manufacturer, and has been kept in a tightly closed con-
tainer to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your
brake system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed hydraulic
master cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin-
der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak-
ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
386 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
mended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Techni-
cal Specifications” for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives. There-
fore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmis-
sion has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an
authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 387
fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an im-
proper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes — Eight-Speed
Transmission
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contami-
nated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disas-
sembled for any reason.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped
The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and
front differential. The exterior surface of these components
should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks. Confirmed
leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in the
middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer case
fluid level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The fluid level
should be even with the bottom of the hole. Use this plug
to add fluid as required.
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer cover
near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differential
fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level should be
even with or slightly below the bottom of the hole.
Fluid Changes
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing And Mainte-
nance” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Rear Axle
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected.
If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for further information.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
an authorized dealer or service station.
388 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 389
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
390 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
–
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
–
⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
–
⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 391
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
–
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
–
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under cer-
tain operating conditions
–
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating condi-
tions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
392 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
–
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
01 means the year 2001
–
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 393
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-
hind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In-
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
394 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 395
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operat-
ing” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
396 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 397
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the rec-
ommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never over-
load them.
398 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 399
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
perature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
400 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immedi-
ately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 401
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa-
tion.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be re-
placed.
402 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled
maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 403
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to steer-
ing, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can
cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering
and suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
(Continued)
404 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am-
bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 405
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud-
ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
406 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collaps-
ible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 407
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
(Continued)
408 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are not hot to
the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent dam-
age to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 409
CAUTION! (Continued)
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
lent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This activ-
ity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY US-
ING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear-
ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only.
• Due to limited clearance, the following traction devices
are recommended:
• Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) Models
• On P215/65R17, P225/60R18 and 235/55R18 tires use a
Peerless Chain Super Z6 low profile traction device or
equivalent is recommended.
• All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
• Original equipment P235/55R19, 235/55R19 tire with a
S Class traction device or equivalent.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
410 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing And Mainte-
nance” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons
for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to
rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manu-
facturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Tire Rotation
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 411
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of
the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all pas-
senger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
412 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protec-
tion.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis-
tance built into your vehicle.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 413
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
414 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 415
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts
from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
416 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer
more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 417
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
䡵 IDENTIFICATION DATA...................421
▫ Vehicle Identification Number .............421
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM ........................422
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .422
▫ Torque Specifications ....................422
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...................424
▫ 3.6L Engine ...........................424
▫ 5.7L Engine ..........................424
▫ 6.4L Engine ...........................425
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ..................425
▫ Materials Added To Fuel .................425
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...............426
▫ Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . .426
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ......427
▫ MMT In Gasoline .......................427
▫ Fuel System Cautions ....................427
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...............428
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) ........428
▫ E-85 General Information .................428
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85)......................428
▫ Fuel Requirements .....................429
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles ..............429
▫ Starting .............................430
▫ Cruising Range ........................430
▫ Replacement Parts ......................430
▫ Maintenance ..........................430
9
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front
corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number
also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure
Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle
registration, and the title.
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is also located on
the right front strut tower inside the engine compartment.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VIN Location
VIN Location
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 421
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake sys-
tems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. There
will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may
be evident by increased pedal travel during application,
greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
OFF), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high performance
braking system. The brake pads are a semi-metallic com-
pound, which offer superior fade resistance for consistent
operation. A compromise to using this type of brake pad is
that the brakes may produce more brake dust and may
squeal slightly under certain weather and operating con-
ditions (i.e., during light brake applications). These are
considered normal conditions.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
422 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is
fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it half-
way).
NOTE: If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or
service station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 423
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded “Regular”
gasoline having an octane rating of 87 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of higher octane “Premium” gaso-
line will not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in
these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
5.7L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide satisfac-
tory fuel economy and performance
when using high-quality unleaded gaso-
line having an octane range of 87 to 89 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is rec-
ommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
424 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
6.4L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sion regulations, provide optimal fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded “Premium” gaso-
line having a posted octane number of
91 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
The use of 91 or higher octane “Pre-
mium” gasoline is required for in this engine.
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immedi-
ately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and may void or
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifi-
cally blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 425
gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a
list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
phragm materials.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15%
ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
426 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 427
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY)
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded
Gasoline Only and/or a yellow fuel cap. Please refer to the
other sections of this manual for information on features
that are common between Flexible Fuel and non-Flexible
Fuel powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
428 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking
materials lit or products that can cause spark in or near
the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas
cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning
agent and never use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating greater than 87
(R+M)/2, or solely E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating be-
tween E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
When switching fuel types:
• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least
5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard start-
ing and/or driveability problems during warm up.
NOTE:
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
rough idle following start up may be experienced even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline addi-
tive, such as Mopar Injector Cleanup or Techron may be
used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated
engine oils. These special requirements are included in
Mopar engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting FCA US
Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended that engine
oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of
Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395 contains
additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet
testing, to provide additional protection to FCA US LLC
engines.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 429
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time it
takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and a
deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until
the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than
gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be experi-
enced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per liter and
the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%,
compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
Ethanol compatible service components are required.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may
affect drivability.
430 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine (87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol or up to 85% Ethanol for Flex Fuel (E-85) En-
gine)
18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
5.7L Engine (89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol) 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
6.4L Engine (91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol) 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
6.4L Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula or equivalent)
10 Quarts 9.5 Liters
5.7L Engine – without Severe Duty II Cooling System (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula or equivalent)
14.5 Quarts 13.9 Liters
5.7L Engine – with Severe Duty II Cooling System (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Cool-
ant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula or equivalent)
15 Quarts 14.3 Liters
6.4L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula or equivalent)
15.2 Quarts 14.4 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 431
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L/5.7L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil,
and Shell Helix Ultra. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
Engine Oil – 6.4L Engine For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating
conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra Platinum 0W-40 or
equivalent Mopar engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material Stan-
dard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E-85)
Engine
87 Octane, Up to 85% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 6.4L Engine 91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol.
432 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 433
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission — 8-Speed Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid
may affect the function or performance of your transmis-
sion.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703. If
DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is accept-
able.
Front Axle – AWD (If Equipped) We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant
SAE 75W90 (API GL-5).
Rear Axle – 3.6/5.7 Engine We recommend you use Mopar OD Synthetic Gear Lu-
bricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).
Rear Axle – 6.4L Engine We recommend you use Mopar LSD Synthetic Gear Lu-
bricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).
Transfer Case – AWD (If Equipped) We recommend you use Mopar Transfer Case Lubricant
for BorgWarner 44–40.
434 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 UCONNECT SYSTEMS ...................437
䡵 DRAG & DROP MENU BAR ................437
䡵 CYBERSECURITY .......................438
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ...................439
▫ Uconnect 4 Settings .....................441
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
4C/4C NAV Settings ....................463
▫ Performance Pages — If Equipped...........486
▫ Performance Control— If Equipped .........495
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED ............................504
▫ Radio Operation........................505
▫ Media Mode ..........................505
䡵 AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL ................505
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .506
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information ..........506
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS .................................508
▫ Introducing Uconnect ....................508
▫ Get Started ...........................509
▫ Basic Voice Commands ...................510
▫ Radio ...............................510
▫ Media ...............................512
▫ Phone ...............................513
▫ Voice Text Reply .......................515
▫ Climate ..............................516
10
▫ Navigation (4C NAV) ....................517
▫ SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV)— If
Equipped ............................518
▫ Register (4C/4C NAV) ...................518
▫ Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV) .....519
▫ Mobile App (4C/4C NAV) ................519
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV).............520
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped ..............520
▫ Do Not Disturb ........................522
▫ Android Auto — If Equipped ..............522
▫ Apple CarPlay — If Equipped..............524
▫ General Information .....................525
▫ Additional Information ...................526
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ............526
436 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE: Uconnect screen images are for illustration pur-
poses only and may not reflect exact software for your
vehicle.
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an
existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the
main menu bar, will now be an active App/shortcut.
NOTE: This feature is only available if the vehicle is
stopped.
Uconnect 4 Main Menu
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Main Menu
10
MULTIMEDIA 437
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
438 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly
regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/support/
software-update.html (U.S. Residents) or www.driveu-
connect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
mation and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Data Collection & Pri-
vacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement or
“Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allows you to access
and change the customer programmable features.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so
can result in damage to the touchscreen.
10
MULTIMEDIA 439
Uconnect 4 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On
Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Buttons On Touchscreen And
Buttons On Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
440 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4 Settings
Press the “Settings” button on the bottom bar, or press the
“Apps
” button, then press the “Settings” button on
the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In
this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access all
of the available programmable features.
NOTE: Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on the
touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen
will allow you to toggle up or down through the available
settings.
The following tables list the settings that may be found
within the Uconnect 4 radio, along with the selectable
options pertaining to each setting.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen,
you may select from the available settings displayed in the
instrument cluster display, and navigation system (if
equipped). The following selectable units of measure are
listed below:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness With Headlight
ON
+–
Display Brightness With Headlights
OFF
+–
10
MULTIMEDIA 441
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Language On Off
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English/Français/Español)
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Lan-
guage” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark ap-
pears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the instrument cluster display, and navigation system (if
equipped). The following selectable units of measure are
listed below:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
Speed MPH km/h
Distance mi km
Fuel Consumption MPG (US) MPG (UK) L/100 km km/L
Pressure psi kPa bar
Temperature °F °C
442 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Sync Time With GPS” feature will allow you to automatically have the radio set the time.
Set Time +–
Set Format 12 hour 24 hour
AM PM
Set Date Up Arrow Down Arrow
10
MULTIMEDIA 443
Setting Name Selectable Options
NOTE:
When in this display, you may set the date manually. Press the “Set Date” button on the touchscreen then press the
corresponding arrows above and below the current date to adjust.
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warn-
ing On/Off — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it remains
off when the vehicle is restarted.
444 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warn-
ing Sensitivity — If
Equipped
Near Far
NOTE:
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an audible and/or visual warning to potential forward colli-
sions. The feature can be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This means the sys-
tem warns you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This gives you the
most reaction time. To change the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near setting. This warns you of a pos-
sible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you.
Forward Collision Warn-
ing (FCW) — Active Brak-
ing — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA
system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning Active
Braking” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected.
10
MULTIMEDIA 445
Setting Name Selectable Options
LaneSense Warning — If
Equipped
Early Medium Late
NOTE:
When the “LanseSense Warning” feature is selected, it sets the distance at which the steering wheel provides feedback
for potential lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to provide either an “Early,” “Medium,” or “Late”
warning zone start point.
LaneSense Strength — If
Equipped
Low Medium High
NOTE:
When the “LaneSense Strength” feature is selected, it sets the strength of the steering wheel feedback for potential
lane departures.
Electric Power Steering
Default — If Equipped
Normal Sport Comfort
NOTE:
When your vehicle is not equipped with Performance Control, the Electric Power Steering Default feature allows you
to adjust the steering effort and feel. Your vehicle comes pre-set to the “Normal” steering setting. This setting pro-
vides a balanced steering feel and steering effort. Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide an increased
amount of steering feel, requiring a higher amount of steering effort. Press the “Comfort” button on the touchscreen
to provide a lower steering effort.
446 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Sound & Display
NOTE:
The ParkSense system scans for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the
vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It provides an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to
other objects. The system can be enabled with Sound, or Sound & Display.
Rear ParkSense Chime
Volume — If Equipped
Low Med High
ParkView Backup Camera
Active Guidelines
On Off
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see ac-
tive guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The im-
age will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note disappears.
10
MULTIMEDIA 447
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera
Delay
On Off
NOTE:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned
on), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to ten seconds after shifting out of “RE-
VERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the ig-
nition is switched to the off position. To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the “Controls” button on the
touchscreen, the “settings” button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Assistance” button on the touchscreen.
Blind Spot Alert — If
Equipped
Off Lights Lights & Chime
448 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
NOTE:
•
When the feature “Blind Spot Alert” is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature Provides alerts, visual and/or audible,
to indicate objects in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode. When this
mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and only shows a visual alert in the exterior
mirrors. When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) shows a visual alert in the exte-
rior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor
(BSM) system is deactivated.
•
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not dam-
aged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor align-
ment. Having a sensor that is misaligned results in the BSM not operating to specification.
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Hill Start Assist” feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is active. To enable or disable,
press the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, and select “On” or “Off.”
10
MULTIMEDIA 449
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 030
60 90
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off. To change the Headlight Off Delay setting, press the “Headlight Off Delay”
button on the touchscreen and choose either “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90” buttons on the touchscreen to select your desired
time interval.
Headlight Illumination On Ap-
proach
030
60 90
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time
the headlights remain on when the doors are unlocked with the key fob. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “Illuminated Approach” button on the touchscreen and choose either “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90” buttons on the
touchscreen to select your desired time interval.
450 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlights With Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Headlights With Wipers” feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the head-
lights will turn on approximately ten seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when
the wipers are turned off, if they were turned on by this feature.
Daytime Running Lights — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Locks” feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or
unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
10
MULTIMEDIA 451
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If
Equipped
On Off
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights flashes when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This
feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote
Start
On Off
1st Press of Key Fob Un-
locks
All Driver
NOTE:
This feature allows you to program your remote door locks to open “All doors” or only the “Driver door” with the
first push of the key fob or grabbing the Passive Entry door handle.
452 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Passive Entry — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
buttons. It automatically unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is grabbed.
Personal Settings Linked
To Key Fob — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
•
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors,
steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the ve-
hicle.
•
The seat returns to the memorized seat location (if Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob is set to on) when the key
fob is used to unlock the door.
10
MULTIMEDIA 453
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 060
30 90
Engine Off Power Delay 0 sec 5 mins
45 sec 10 mins
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped), DVD video
system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets remain active for up to ten minutes after the
ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door cancels this feature.
454 MULTIMEDIA
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE: Before compass calibration is performed, the com-
pass variance zone should be set for best results.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Compass Variance 1 23456789101112131415
NOTE:
When the “Compass Variance” feature is selected, it allows the compass variance to be set to any number from 1 to
15 per the compass variance zone map figure.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differ-
ences, the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map. Once
properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide the most
accurate compass headings.
10
MULTIMEDIA 455
Compass Variance Zone Map
456 MULTIMEDIA
Compass Calibration Yes
NOTE:
Press “Compass Calibration” on the touchscreen to enter calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the
“Yes” button on the touchscreen and complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or me-
tallic objects). A message will appear on the touchscreen when the compass has been successfully calibrated.
Keep magnetic materials away from the rear view mirror, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This
is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false
readings.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer +-
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+”
and “–” buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
10
MULTIMEDIA 457
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Arrow Buttons “C” icon
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or
use the arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
Speed Adjusted Vol-
ume
Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed
Adjusted Volume press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touchscreen and select from “Off,” “1,” “2” or
“3” buttons on the touchscreen.
Surround Sound —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To make your selection, press the “Sur-
round Sound” button on the touchscreen, and select “On” or “Off.”
458 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
AUX Volume Offset
— If Equipped
+–
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through
the AUX input. To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset” button on the touchscreen, select “+” and
“–”.
Auto Play — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE: The Auto Play feature allows a media device to begin playing when the media device is plugged in. To make
your selection, press the On or Off buttons to activate or deactivate Auto Play.
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE: Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (both, text,
call), Auto Reply Message (custom, default) and Custom Auto Reply Message (create message).
10
MULTIMEDIA 459
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones/Devices List of Paired Phones/Devices
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
Channel Skip Name of Channel
NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on
the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Information Subscription Info
460 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their de-
fault settings. If “Yes” is selected, a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to de-
fault?” Select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit.
10
MULTIMEDIA 461
Setting Name Selectable Options
Reset App Drawer to Default Order Ok Cancel
When this feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default
setting, press the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen. A pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want
to reset your settings to default?”
Restore Apps Ok Cancel
Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel
NOTE: When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Clock, Audio,
Radio, Bluetooth devices, Apps, and Favorites.
Modem Reset Ok Cancel
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. If “Yes” is se-
lected a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear, or “Can-
cel” to exit.
462 MULTIMEDIA
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Software License System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “Software License” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying the
system software version. You can also update your maps with a USB device. Please see your authorized dealer for
further information.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
4C/4C NAV Settings
Press the “Apps
” button (If Equipped), and then
press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to dis-
play the menu setting screen. In this mode, the
Uconnect system allows you to access programmable
features that may be equipped such as Language, Dis-
play, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance,
Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off
Options, Audio, Phone, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Set-
tings, Clear Personal Data and System Information.
NOTE: Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
either press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on the
touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
up or down arrow button on the right side of the screen
will allow you to toggle up or down through the available
settings.
10
MULTIMEDIA 463
Language
After pressing the “Language” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Language English Français Español
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness With Headlights
ON
+–
NOTE:
•
When in the “Display Brightness With Headlights ON” display, you may select the brightness with the headlights
on.
•
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the inte-
rior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
464 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Brightness With Headlights
OFF
+–
NOTE:
•
When in the “Display Brightness With Headlights OFF” display, you may select the brightness with the headlights
off. Adjust the brightness from (1–10) with the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
•
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the inte-
rior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Set Theme List of themes
NOTE:
When in the “Set Theme” display, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the
⬙Set Theme⬙ button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark appears show-
ing that the setting has been selected.
AutoShow Smartphone Display
Upon Connection — If Equipped
On Off
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Controls Screen Time-Out — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time Out” feature is selected, the controls screen will stay open for five seconds before the
screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
10
MULTIMEDIA 465
Setting Name Selectable Options
Navigation Next Turn Pop-Ups Dis-
played In Cluster — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the in-
strument cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the instrument cluster display, and navigation system (if
equipped). The following selectable units of measure are
listed below:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE: When the “Custom” setting is selected, units will appear according to your personally configured settings. To
configure these settings, press the “Custom” bar. The following settings will appear:
Speed MPH km/h
Distance mi km
Fuel Consumption MPG (US) MPG (UK) L/100 km km/L
Pressure psi kPa bar
Temperature °F °C
466 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never w/Help Always
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Sync Time With GPS” feature will allow you to automatically have the radio set the time.
Set Time Hours +–
Set Time Minutes +–
Time Format 12 hrs 24 hrs
AM PM
10
MULTIMEDIA 467
Setting Name Selectable Options
Show Time In Status Bar — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Show Time In Status Bar” feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar.
Camera
After pressing the “Camera” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled
if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
468 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Active ParkView Backup Camera
Guidelines
On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or
dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering
wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist
with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warn-
ing On/Off — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will re-
main off when the vehicle is restarted.
10
MULTIMEDIA 469
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warn-
ing Sensitivity — If
Equipped
Near Far
NOTE:
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an audible and/or visual warning to potential forward colli-
sions. The feature can be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This means the sys-
tem warns you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This gives you the
most reaction time. To change the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near setting. This warns you of a pos-
sible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you.
Forward Collision Warn-
ing (FCW) — Active Brak-
ing — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA
system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning Active
Braking” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected.
470 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
LaneSense Warning — If
Equipped
Early Medium Late
NOTE:
When the “LanseSense Warning” feature is selected, it sets the distance at which the steering wheel provides feedback
for potential lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to provide either an “Early,” “Medium,” or “Late”
warning zone start point.
LaneSense Strength — If
Equipped
Low Medium High
NOTE:
When the “LaneSense Strength” feature is selected, it sets the strength of the steering wheel feedback for potential
lane departures.
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound & Display
NOTE:
The ParkSense system scans for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the
vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It provides an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to
other objects. The system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound & Display.
10
MULTIMEDIA 471
Setting Name Selectable Options
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Med High
NOTE:
The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be selected from the Instrument Cluster Display or Uconnect System.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MED, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MED. ParkSense
retains its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
Electric Power Steering
Default— If Equipped
Normal Sport Comfort
NOTE:
When your vehicle is not equipped with Performance Control, the Electric Power Steering Default feature allows you
to adjust the steering effort and feel. Your vehicle comes pre-set to the “Normal” steering setting. This setting pro-
vides a balanced steering feel and steering effort. Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide an increased
amount of steering feel, requiring a higher amount of steering effort. Press the “Comfort” button on the touchscreen
to provide a lower steering effort.
Blind Spot Alert — If
Equipped
Off Lights Lights & Chime
472 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
NOTE:
•
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature Provides alerts, visual and/or audible,
to indicate objects in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode. When this
mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and only shows a visual alert in the exterior
mirrors. When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on.
•
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not dam-
aged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor align-
ment. Having a sensor that is misaligned results in the BSM not operating to specification.
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Hill Start Assist” feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is active.
10
MULTIMEDIA 473
Mirrors & Wipers
After pressing the “Mirror and Wipers” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected and the wipers are on, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it
senses moisture on the windshield.
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Side Mirror In Reverse” feature is selected, the exterior sideview mirrors will tilt downward when the
ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move
back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
Headlights with Wipers On Off
474 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay “0 sec, 30 sec” etc.
Headlight Illumination On Ap-
proach
030
60 90
Headlights With Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
Auto Dim High Beams — If
Equipped
On Off
Daytime Running Lights — If
Equipped
On Off
Steering Directed Lights — If
Equipped
On Off
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 475
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If
Equipped
On Off
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlocks On Exit” feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission
is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights flash when the doors are locked or un-
locked with the key fob, or when using the passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with or without the
“Sound Horn on Lock” feature selected.
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote
Start — If Equipped
On Off
1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks
Driver Door All Doors
476 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
NOTE:
•
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver’s door unlocks with the first
press of the key fob unlock button. You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s
doors. When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors unlock on the first press of the key
fob unlock button.
•
If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors unlock no matter which Passive
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the
driver’s door unlocks when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
“Driver Door” is programmed, touching the handle more than once results in only the driver’s door opening. If
“Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to un-
lock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key fob
lock or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the touchscreen, until a check-
mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
10
MULTIMEDIA 477
Setting Name Selectable Options
Personal Settings Linked
To Key Fob — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
•
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors,
steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the ve-
hicle.
•
The seat returns to the memorized seat location (if Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob is set to on) when the key
fob is used to unlock the door.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Dr Heat Seat Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when tem-
peratures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
478 MULTIMEDIA
Key Off Options
After pressing the “Key Off Options” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, the driver’s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is
shut off.
Key Off Power Delay 0 sec 45 sec
5 mins 10 mins
NOTE:
When the “Key Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if
equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
up to ten minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Key Off Power Delay setting, press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval, and
choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes.”
10
MULTIMEDIA 479
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30,
60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on
the touchscreen to select your desired time interval.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade “Speaker” Icon Arrow Buttons
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use
the arrows to adjust, or tap the “Speaker” icon to readjust to the center.
Equalizer +–
480 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
NOTE:
•
The “Equalizer” feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+”
and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons
on the touchscreen.
•
Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly
on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Vol-
ume
Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed
Adjusted Volume press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
Surround Sound —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To make your selection, press the “Sur-
round Sound” button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
10
MULTIMEDIA 481
Setting Name Selectable Options
AUX Volume Offset
— If Equipped
-3 +3
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through
the AUX input. To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match button on the touchscreen, choose a level from
–3 to +3.
Auto Play On Off
NOTE:
The Auto Play feature allows a media device to begin playing when the media device is plugged in. To make your
selection, press the On or Off buttons to activate or deactivate Auto Play.
Phone/Bluetooth Settings
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth Settings” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto
Reply Message (custom, default) and Custom Auto Reply Message (create message).
482 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones and Audio Sources List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones and Audio Sources” feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and
Audio Sources Settings system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Smartphone Projection Manager On Off
NOTE: Pressing “Smartphone Projection Manager” feature allows you to see a list of all connected phones and gives
you the option to determine which phone will be used for projection (Apple CarPlay or Android Auto).
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
Channel Skip Name of Channel
NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on
the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
10
MULTIMEDIA 483
Setting Name Selectable Options
Subscription Information Subscription Info
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Reset
After pressing the “Reset” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Reset App Drawer to De-
fault
Ok Cancel
Restore Apps Ok Cancel
Restore Settings to Default Ok Cancel X
484 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will reset all of the radio features to their default settings. To restore the settings to
their default setting, press the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen. A pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you
sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel X
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove per-
sonal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want
to clear all personal data?”
Modem Reset OK Cancel
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Software License System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “Software License” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying the
system software version. You can also update your maps with a USB device. Please see your authorized dealer for
further information.
10
MULTIMEDIA 485
Performance Pages — If Equipped
Performance Pages is an application that provides a dis-
play for performance indicators, as received from the
instrument cluster, that will help you gain familiarity with
the capabilities of your vehicle in real-time.
To access the Performance Pages, press the “Apps” button
on the touchscreen then press the “Performance Pages”
button on the touchscreen. Press the desired button on the
touchscreen to access that specific Performance Page.
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor-
mance Pages is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the limits
of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured
by the Performance Pages must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The Performance Pages include the following:
• Home
• Timers
• Gauges
• G-Force
• Engine
• Dyno
486 MULTIMEDIA
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Home
When Home is selected, a series of widgets (gauges) can be
customized by the user. Follow these steps to change a
widget:
1. Touch any of the gauges to change them.
2. Select the following option from the menu:
• Set Widget: Top Left
• Set Widget: Top Right
• Set Widget: Bottom Left
• Set Widget: Bottom Right
3. After selecting a Widget location: select the gauge to
display:
• Gauge: Oil Temp
• Gauge: Oil Pressure
• Gauge: Coolant Temp
• Gauge: Battery Voltage
• Gauge: Trans Temp — If Equipped with an Automatic
Transmission
• Gauge: Battery Voltage
• Gauge: Engine Torque
Performance Pages — Home
10
MULTIMEDIA 487
• Gauge: Engine Power
• Gauge: G-Force
• Gauge: Steering Angle
• Gauge: Current Gear
• Gauge: Current Speed
• Gauge: Top Speed
• Timer: 0-60 MPH
• Timer: 0-100 MPH
• Timer: 60 Ft Time
• Timer: 1/8 Mile
• Timer: 1/4 Mile
• Timer: Brake Distance
• Timer: Reaction Time
Timers
When the Timers Page is selected, you will be able to select
from following “Tickets”:
• Current
Pressing the “Current” button displays a “real time” sum-
mary of performance timers.
Performance Pages — Timers
488 MULTIMEDIA
• Last
Pressing the “Last” button displays the last recorded run of
performance timers.
• Best
Pressing the “Best” button displays the best recorded run
of performance timers, except for braking data.
• Save
Pressing the “Save” button will let you save the visible
page, current/last/best. Any saved run over ten will
overwrite the last saved run for Uconnect System storage.
The operation of the Save feature is listed below:
• With a USB jump drive installed, press the “USB” button
to save to the jump drive.
• Press the “Uconnect” button to save the runs to the
Owner web page.
• Press the “Cancel” button to view the last timer “Ticket”.
Performance Pages — Save
10
MULTIMEDIA 489
The “Tickets” contain the timers listed below:
• Reaction Time
Measures the driver’s reaction time for launching the
vehicle against a simulated drag strip timing light (behav-
ior modeled after 500 Sportsman Tree) displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE: The Reaction Time, MPH, ⅛ and ¼ Mile timers will
be “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH (0 km/h).
• 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
60 mph (0 to 100 km/h).
• 0-100 MPH (0-160 km/h)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
100 mph (0 to 160 km/h).
• ⅛ Mile (200 meter) ET
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ⅛ mile
(200 meters).
• ⅛ Mile (200 meter) MPH
Displays the vehicle speed at the time ⅛ mile (200 meters)
was reached.
• ¼ Mile (400 meter) ET
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go ¼ mile (400
meters).
• ¼ Mile (400 meter) MPH
Displays the speed the vehicle was at when ¼ mile (400
meters) was reached.
• Brake Distance ft
Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a full
stop.
NOTE: The distance measurement will be aborted if the
brake pedal is released or the parking brake is engaged,
before the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
• Brake from MPH
Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the brake
pedal is pressed.
NOTE: Brake Distance and Speed timers only displays
⬙ready⬙ when vehicle is traveling at greater than 30 MPH
(48 km/h).
490 MULTIMEDIA
Gauges
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
• Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature.
• Battery Voltage
Shows the actual battery voltage
• Trans Oil Temp — If Equipped with an Automatic
Transmission
Shows the actual transmission oil temperature.
• Intake Air Temperature
Shows the actual intake air temperature.
If a gauge is selected, the Gauge Detail View page will
appear on the screen. This page shows further information
on the selected gauge.
Performance Pages — Gauges
10
MULTIMEDIA 491
Press the left and right arrows will cycle through the details
for each of the gauges. Pressing the lower X button in the
top right corner will return to the gauge menu.
G-Force
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force values
as well as steering angle.
Gauge Detail View Page
G-Force
492 MULTIMEDIA
When G-Force is selected, the following features will be
available:
• Vehicle Speed:
Measures the current speed of the vehicle in either mph
or km/h, starting at zero with no maximum value.
• Front G-Force:
Measures the force on the front of the vehicle.
• Right G-Force:
Measures the force on the right side of the vehicle.
• Left G-Forces:
Measures the force on the left of the vehicle.
• Rear G-Forces:
Measures the force on the rear of the vehicle.
NOTE: Front, Right, Left, and Rear G-Froces are all peak
values. These readings can be reset by clearing peak
G-Force on the instrument cluster
• Steering Wheel Angle
Steering Wheel Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor to
measure the degree of the steering wheel relative to zero.
The zero degree measurement indicates a steering wheel
straight ahead position. When the steering angle value is
negative, this indicates a turn to the left, and when the
steering angle value is positive, a turn to the right.
The friction circle display shows instantaneous G-Force as
a highlight and previous G-Force as dots within the circle.
The system records previous G-Force for three minutes. If
there are multiple samples at a given point, the color of the
dot will darken from blue to red. Vectors more frequent
will show in red; infrequent vectors will show in blue.
10
MULTIMEDIA 493
Engine
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Vehicle Speed
Shows the actual vehicle speed.
• Engine Power
Shows the instantaneous power.
• Engine Torque
Shows the instantaneous torque.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual engine oil pressure.
• Gear (Automatic Transmission Only)
Shows the current (or pending) operating gear of the
vehicle.
Engine
494 MULTIMEDIA
Dynamometer (Dyno)
The system will start drawing graphs for Power and
Torque. The graph will fill to the right side of the page
(based on History time selected). Once the right side of the
page is reached, the graph will scroll with the right side
always being the most recent recorded sample.
The following options can be selected:
• Pressing the STOP button will freeze the graph. Selecting
Play will clear the graph and restart the process over
• Press the “+” or “–” buttons to change the history of the
graph. The selectable options are 30, 60, 90, 120 seconds.
The graph will expand or constrict depending on the
setting selected.
•
Select the “Gear” display setting to turn the graph gear
markers on and off for automatic transmission vehicles
only.
Performance Control— If Equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with a Performance Control
feature which allows for coordinating the operation of
various vehicle systems depending upon the type of driv-
ing behavior desired. The Performance Control feature is
controlled through the Uconnect system and may be ac-
cessed by performing any of the following:
• Pushing the Super Track Pack button on the instrument
panel switch bank.
•
Selecting “Performance Control” from the “Apps” menu.
• Selecting “Performance Control” from within the Perfor-
mance Pages menu.
Dyno Page
10
MULTIMEDIA 495
You will be able to enable, disable, and customize the
functionality of the Launch Control and Performance Con-
trol Set-Up features within Performance Control.
Descriptions of these features are provided below. To
access information about the functionality of these features
through the Uconnect system, press the “Info” button on
the touchscreen.
Launch Mode
WARNING!
Launch Mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. It is recommended that this feature be used
in a controlled environment, and within the limits of
the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by
the performance pages must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system that
is designed to allow the driver to achieve maximum
vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Control is a
form of traction control that manages tire slip while
launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use
during race events on a closed course where consistent
quarter mile and 0–60 times are desired. The system is not
intended to compensate for lack of driver experience or
Launch Control
496 MULTIMEDIA
familiarity with the race track. Use of this feature in low
traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions may results in
excess wheel slip outside this systems control resulting in
an aborted launch.
NOTE:
• Launch control should not be used on public roads.
Always check track conditions and the surrounding
area.
• Launch Control is not available for the first 500 miles of
the vehicle’s life.
• Launch Control should only be used when the engine
and transmission are at operating temperature.
• Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved
road surfaces only. Use on slippery or loose surfaces
may cause damage to vehicle components and is not
recommended.
Performance Control Set-Up
Pressing the “Performance Control Set-Up” button on the
touchscreen within the Performance Control screen indi-
cates the real-time status of the various systems. Pressing
Performance Control Set-Up
10
MULTIMEDIA 497
the “Sport Mode Set-Up” or “Default Mode Set-Up” but-
tons on the touchscreen allows the driver to configure their
individual drive modes and see how those configurations
affect the performance of the vehicle.
NOTE: Not all of the options listed in this manual are
available on every vehicle, below is a chart with all
available Performance Control vehicle configurations.
Available Mode Configurations
Transmission Auto
Engine N/A
Engine/Trans X
Steering X
Paddle Shifters X
Traction Control X
Refer to the Sport and Default modes for their detailed
operation.
NOTE: These settings will remain in effect when using the
Launch Control feature.
Default Mode
The vehicle will always start in Default Mode. This mode is
for typical driving conditions. While in Default Mode, the
Engine, Transmission and Traction will operate in their
Normal settings and cannot be changed. The Steering assist
may be configured to Normal, Sport, or Comfort by
pressing the corresponding buttons on the touchscreen.
Default Mode
498 MULTIMEDIA
The Paddle Shifters may be enabled or disabled while in
this mode.
Sport Mode
Sport Mode is a configuration set-up for typical enthusiast
driving. The Transmission and Steering are both set to their
Sport settings. The steering wheel paddle switches are
enabled. The Traction Control defaults to Normal. Any of
these four settings may be changed to the driver’s prefer-
ences by pressing the buttons on the touchscreen. Push the
Default Mode Set-Up Sport Mode
10
MULTIMEDIA 499
Sport button on the instrument panel switch bank to put
the vehicle in Sport Mode and activate these settings. The
customized settings will only be active when the Sport
button is active.
Possible Performance Control configurations are listed
below with accompanying descriptions. The information
contained in the list below can also be accessed from within
the mode Set-Up menus. To access the information, press
the “Info” button on the touchscreen from the mode Set-Up
menu, and use the left/right arrows to toggle through
available descriptions. The title for each system in the
Set-Up menu can be pressed, which provides the descrip-
tions for each function of that system.
Sport Mode Set-Up
500 MULTIMEDIA
Engine/Trans • SPORT
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen for improved
throttle response and modified shifting for an enhanced
driving experience.
• NORMAL
Press the “Norm” button on the touchscreen for a balance
of throttle response, shift comfort and economy for normal
driving.
Engine/Trans
10
MULTIMEDIA 501
Paddle Shifters — If Equipped With Automatic
Transmission
• ON
Press the “ON” button on the touchscreen to enable
steering wheel Paddle Shifters.
• OFF
Press the “OFF” button on the touchscreen to disable
steering wheel Paddle Shifters.
Paddle – Automatic Transmission
502 MULTIMEDIA
Traction
• SPORT
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to turn off
traction control and reduce stability control.
• NORMAL
Press the “Norm” button on the touchscreen to provide full
traction control and full stability control.
Steering
Traction Control
Steering
10
MULTIMEDIA 503
• SPORT
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide an
increased amount of steering feel, requiring a higher
amount of steering effort.
• NORMAL
Press the “Norm” button on the touchscreen to provide a
balanced steering feel and steering effort. This is also your
vehicles pre-set steering setting.
• COMFORT
Press the “Comf” button on the touchscreen to provide a
lower steering effort.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
AUX, etc.).
Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
504 MULTIMEDIA
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is
different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track on
the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth). Pushing the
bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it
is within eight seconds after the current track begins to
play.
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL
This feature allows an external USB device to be plugged
into the USB port.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
Located on the rear of the front center console are dual USB
“Charge Only” ports.
AUX/USB Ports
1 — USB 1 Port
2 — Aux Jack
3 — USB 2 Port
10
MULTIMEDIA 505
The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge battery oper-
ated USB devices when connected.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the an-
tenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation when not
using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommen-
dations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific com-
munity.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wire-
less devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
Rear USB Charging Ports
506 MULTIMEDIA
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation. This equipment gener-
ates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to radio commu-
nications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
2. Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced radio
technician for help.
10
MULTIMEDIA 507
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect system.
NOTE: If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the
Apps menus, of your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect
4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C system.
Uconnect 4
Uconnect 4C NAV
508 MULTIMEDIA
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instruc-
tions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conver-
sations are examples of noise that may impact recogni-
tion.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the
rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the Voice Recognition (VR) or Phone button,
wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio, Media, or Climate Func-
tions. For 8.4–inch System Only: Push To Begin Navigation Function
3 — Push To End Call
10
MULTIMEDIA 509
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• “ Cancel” to stop a current voice session
• “ Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• “ Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• “ Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
• “ Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say,
“ Help.” The system provides you with a list of com-
mands.
510 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4 Radio
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio
10
MULTIMEDIA 511
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxil-
iary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
• “ Change source to Bluetooth”
• “ Change source to AUX”
• “ Change source to USB”
• “ Play artist Beethoven”; “ Play album Greatest Hits”; “
Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “ Play genre Classical”
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command
must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Uconnect 4 Media
512 MULTIMEDIA
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “ Call John Smith”
• “ Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts”
• “ Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)”
• “ Call back (call previous incoming phone number)”
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media
10
MULTIMEDIA 513
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “ Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “ Call
John Smith work.”
Uconnect 4 Phone
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone
514 MULTIMEDIA
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect announces incoming text messages. Push the
Phone button
and say “ Listen.” (Must have compat-
ible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
Phone button
. After the beep, say: “ Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No. Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be <num-
ber> minutes
late.
Call me. Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you later. I need direc-
tions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation
of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of
this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these four simple steps:
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle
4 — Turn On “Show Notifications”
10
MULTIMEDIA 515
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send a text message.
Climate
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free
and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “ Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
• “ Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Uconnect 4 Climate
516 MULTIMEDIA
Navigation (4C NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the
beep, say: “ Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Climate
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Navigation
10
MULTIMEDIA 517
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV)— If Equipped
CAUTION!
Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including SOS Call
and Roadside Assistance Call will NOT work without
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) net-
work connection compatible with your device.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian services in the next
section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian,
press the Apps button on the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
touchscreen to get started.
NOTE: SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska, Hawaii and Canada. Services can only be used
where coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
SOS Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Send & Go
Vehicle Finder
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call
Vehicle Health Reports**
Vehicle Health Alert**
Performance Pages Plus**
**If vehicle is equipped.
Register (4C/4C NAV)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your
vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian ser-
vices.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.
518 MULTIMEDIA
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian Customer Care agent who will activate ser-
vices in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate
on the web.
• U.S. residents visit: www.siriusxm.com/guardian.
• Canadian residents visit: www.siriusxm.ca/guardian.
Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV)
Your vehicle will send you a monthly email report, which
summarizes the performance of your vehicle’s key systems
so you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs
if you are registered for SiriusXM Guardian. Your vehicle
will also send you Vehicle Health Alerts when it detects
issues with its key systems that need your attention. For
further information, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-
mands and sending a destination from your phone to your
vehicle.
To use the Uconnect Mobile App:
• Once you have registered your SiriusXM Guardian
services, download the Uconnect App to your mobile
device. Use your Owner Account login and password to
open the app.
• Once on the “Remote” screen, you can begin using
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and
activate your horn and lights remotely, if equipped.
Mobile App
10
MULTIMEDIA 519
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom menu bar of
the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send
a location to your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle
Finder and Send & Go , if equipped.
• Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper left corner of
the app to bring up app settings.
NOTE: For further information please visit
DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents).
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check
a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM
Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 4C NAV system. (Not
available for Uconnect 4 system.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “ Show fuel prices”
• “ Show 5 - day weather forecast”
• “ Show extended weather”
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select
media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean and re-
sponds back to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on
the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
SiriusXM Travel Link
520 MULTIMEDIA
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts
and music, get directions, read text messages and many
other useful requests.
Uconnect 4 Siri Eyes Free Available
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Siri Eyes Free
Available
10
MULTIMEDIA 521
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls
and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text mes-
sage, a call or both, when declining an incoming call and
send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being inter-
rupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth MAP.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto features
may or may not be available in every region and/or
language.
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with
Android’s best-in-class speech technology through your
vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smart-
phone’s data plan to project your Android powered smart-
phone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or
higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-
provided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon
that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to
begin Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone” icon
522 MULTIMEDIA
within Android Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which
recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
• Maps
• Music
• Phone
• Text Messages
• Additional Apps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
NOTE: Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and download app on
Google Play. Android, Android Auto, and Google Play are
trademarks of Google Inc.
Android Auto On 7-inch Display
Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display
10
MULTIMEDIA 523
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped
NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay features
may or may not be available in every region and/or
language.
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact
with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your
iPhone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of
the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning
cable, and press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple
CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel, or press and hold the “Home” button within Apple
CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice
commands to use a list of your iPhone’s features:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
• Additional Apps
Apple CarPlay On 7-inch Display
524 MULTIMEDIA
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
NOTE: Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for phone
compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface
is a product of Apple®. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of
Apple Inc. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the US and other countries. Apple terms of use and
privacy statements apply.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display
10
MULTIMEDIA 525
Additional Information
© 2018 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-
855-8400(24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800-
465-2001(English) or 1-800-387-9983(French)
SiriusXM Guardian services support:
• U.S. residents visit www.siriusxm.com/guardian or call:
1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.ca/guardian or
call: 1-877-324-9091
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc), oversized, or
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
526 MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ........................528
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ..............528
▫ Prepare A List .........................528
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ..............528
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................528
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center .............529
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........529
▫ In Mexico Contact ......................529
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands..........529
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) ....................530
▫ Service Contract .......................530
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION ...............531
䡵 MOPARPARTS .........................531
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .............531
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .531
▫ In Canada ............................532
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............532
11
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
528 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423-6343
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 423-6343
Fax: (787) 782-3345
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 529
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunica-
tion Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu-
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac-
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufactur-
er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con-
tract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manu-
facturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
530 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail-
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 531
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Master-
card, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and fea-
tures. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driv-
ability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com (U.S.)
532 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
12
About Your Brakes .........................422
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . . .246
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .............382
Adding Fuel ..............................281
Adding Washing Fluid .......................366
Additives, Fuel ............................425
Adjust
Forward ................................45
Rearward ...............................45
AirBag .................................186
Advance Front Air Bag ....................186
Air Bag Operation ........................188
Air Bag Warning Light .....................184
Driver Knee Air Bag ......................189
Enhanced Accident Response .............194, 349
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................350
FrontAirBag ...........................186
If Deployment Occurs .....................193
Knee Impact Bolsters ......................188
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............196
Maintenance ............................196
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............185
Side Air Bags ...........................189
Transporting Pets ........................213
Air Bag Light.......................131, 184, 215
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)......371
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..................371
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ................371, 372
Air Conditioner System ......................371
Air Conditioning .........................76, 82
Air Conditioning Filter ....................90, 373
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ................89
Air Filter ................................371
Air Pressure
Tires..................................400
Alarm
Arm The System .......................33, 35
Panic ..................................20
Rearm The System ........................35
Security Alar
m........................33, 135
Alarm System
Security Alarm ...........................33
All Wheel Drive
Towing ................................348
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ......................388
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ................5
Android Auto .............................522
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................381, 431
Disposal ...............................384
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................146
534 INDEX
Anti-Lock Warning Light .....................139
Apple CarPlay ............................524
Arming System
Security Alarm ...........................33
Assist, Hill Start ...........................153
Audio Systems (Radio).......................437
Auto Down Power Windows ...................92
Automatic Door Locks........................41
Automatic Headlights ........................67
Automatic High Beams .......................66
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..........82, 88
Automatic Transmission ..................232, 388
Adding Fluid .....................388, 432, 434
Fluid And Filter Change ...................388
Fluid Change ...........................388
Fluid Level Check ........................387
Fluid Type .......................387, 432, 434
Special Additives .........................387
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode .....41, 238
Autostick
Operation ..............................238
Auto Up Power Windows .....................92
AuxCord................................505
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .........112
AWD
Towing ................................348
Axle Fluid ............................432, 434
Axle Lubrication ........................432, 434
Back-Up .................................279
Battery...............................133, 366
Charging System Light ....................133
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ................21
Location ...............................366
Belts, Seat ................................215
Body Mechanism Lubrication ..................375
B-Pillar Location ...........................395
Brake Assist System .........................147
Brake Control System........................147
Brake Fluid ........................385, 432, 434
Brake System ..........................385,
422
Fluid Check ......................385, 432, 434
Master Cylinder .........................385
Parking ...............................227
Warning Light .......................132, 422
Brake/Transmission Interlock ..................231
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle..........226
Brightness, Interior Lights .....................72
12
INDEX 535
Bulb Replacement ..........................307
Bulbs, Light ...........................217, 307
Camera, Rear .............................279
Capacities, Fluid ...........................431
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ......................362, 369, 370
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .................383
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................214, 428
Cargo
Vehicle Loading ..........................283
Cargo Area Cover ..........................101
Cargo Compartment ........................101
Car Washes...............................414
Cellular Phone ............................506
Certification Label ..........................284
Chains, Tire ..............................410
Changing A Flat Tire ........................388
Chart, Tire Sizing...........................391
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .143
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............213
Checks, Safety.............................213
Child Restraint ............................197
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............................201
Child Seat Installation .....................210
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ........207
Infant And Child Restraints .................200
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......203
Older Children And Child Restraints ...........200
Seating Positions .........................202
Child Safety Locks ..........................41
Clean Air Gasoline .........................425
Cleaning
Wheels ................................409
Climate Control ............................76
Automatic ............................76, 82
Manual ................................76
Coin Holder ..............................109
Cold W
eather Operation......................225
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance................526
Compact Spare Tire .........................407
Console
Floor .................................109
Contract, Service ...........................530
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............383
Cooling System ............................380
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .................382
Coolant Level ........................381, 384
Cooling Capacity .........................431
536 INDEX
Disposal Of Used Coolant ..................384
Drain, Flush, And Refill ....................381
Inspection ..............................384
Points To Remember ......................384
Pressure Cap ............................383
Radiator Cap ...........................383
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......381, 431, 432
Corrosion Protection ........................413
Cruise Control (Speed Control)..............243, 246
Cruise Light ...........................140, 141
Cupholders ...............................111
Customer Assistance ........................528
Cybersecurity .............................438
Daytime Running Lights ......................65
Dealer Service .............................367
Deck Lid
Power Release ...........................98
Defroster, Windshield........................215
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ....................74
Diagnostic System, Onboard...................142
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ...............................66
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ............................365
Disable Vehicle Towing ......................346
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................384
Disturb..................................522
Door Ajar ................................133
Door Ajar Light............................133
Door Locks
Automatic ..............................41
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors .......41
Doors....................................35
Drag And Drop Menu .......................437
Drive Modes ..............................495
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ........................43
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water .................................296
E-85 Fuel ................................428
Electric Brake Control System ..................147
Anti-Lock Brake
System ....................146
Electronic Roll Mitigation ...............148, 155
Electric Remote Mirrors .......................62
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) .......312
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .........244
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...............149
12
INDEX 537
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........133
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck .................345
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................301
Jacking ............................323, 388
Jump Starting ........................338, 340
Towing ................................346
Emission Control System Maintenance............143
Engine ...........................362, 363, 364
Air Cleaner .............................371
Block Heater ............................225
Break-In Recommendations .................226
Checking Oil Level .......................365
Compartment ....................362, 363, 364
Compartment Identification .................362
Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................381, 432
Cooling ...............................380
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................214, 428
Fails To Start ............................225
Flooded, Starting .........................225
Fuel Requirements ....................424, 431
Jump Starting ........................338, 340
Oil ............................368, 431, 432
Oil Filler Cap .....................362, 369, 370
Oil Filter ...............................371
Oil Selection .........................368, 431
Oil Synthetic ............................370
Overheating ............................342
Starting ............................222, 223
Engine Oil Viscosity .....................369, 370
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ....................369
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .........194, 349
Ethanol ..............................426, 428
Exhaust Gas Cautions ....................214, 428
Exhaust System ........................214, 379
Exterior Lighting............................
64
Exterior Lights ..........................64, 217
Filters
Air Cleaner .............................371
Air Conditioning ......................90, 373
Engine Oil ..........................371, 432
Engine Oil Disposal .......................370
Flashers .................................301
Hazard Warning .........................301
Turn Signals ......................69, 141, 217
Flash-To-Pass ..............................67
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range ..........................430
Engine Oil .............................429
538 INDEX
Fuel Requirements ....................428, 429
Maintenance ............................430
Replacement Parts ........................430
Starting ...............................430
Flooded Engine Starting ......................225
Floor Console .............................109
Fluid, Brake ...........................432, 434
Fluid Capacities............................431
Fluid Leaks...............................217
Fluid Level Checks
Brake .................................385
Cooling System ..........................381
Engine Oil .............................365
Transfer Case ...........................388
Fluids And Lubricants .......................432
Fog Lights ................................68
Fold-Flat Seats .............................43
Folding Rear Seats ..........................53
Forward Collision Warning....................163
Four-Way Hazard Flasher.....................301
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ......................345
Fuel ....................................424
Additives ..............................425
Clean Air ..............................425
Ethanol ............................426, 428
Flexible ...............................428
Gasoline ...............................424
Materials Added .........................425
Methanol ..............................426
Octane Rating ........................424, 432
Requirements ........................424, 431
Specifications ...........................432
Tank Capacity ...........................431
Fuses ...................................311
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ...............102
Gasoline, Clean Air .........................425
Gasoline, Reformulated ......................425
Gear
Ranges ..............................234
Glass Cleaning ............................417
Gross Axle Weight Rating .................284, 286
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...............284, 286
GVWR ..................................284
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water ..........................296
Hazard Warning Flashers .....................301
12
INDEX 539
Headlights
Automatic ..............................67
Cleaning ...............................414
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...........66
Lights On Reminder .......................68
On With Wipers ..........................67
Passing ................................67
Switch .................................64
Time Delay ..............................68
Washers ...............................366
Head Restraints .......................54, 55, 56
Head Rests ...........................54, 55, 56
Heated Mirrors .............................63
Heater, Engine Block ........................225
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch ......66
Hill Start Assist ............................153
Hitches
Trailer Towing ...........................288
Holder, Coin ..............................109
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ...............102
Hood Prop ................................97
Hood Release ..............................97
Ignition ..................................25
Switch .................................25
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ......................31
Information Center, Vehicle ...................122
Inside Rearview Mirror .................60, 61, 301
Instrument Cluster ......................118,121
Descriptions ............................141
Display ............................122, 125
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................416
Interior Appearance Care .....................415
Interior Lights..............................69
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers)...............74
Introduction ................................4
Jack Location .............................324
Jack Operation ............................388
Jump Starting ..........................338, 340
Key Fob
Arm The System ..........................33
Panic Alarm .............................20
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........24, 32
Unlatch The Trunk ........................20
540 INDEX
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .....21
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ......24
Key-In Reminder............................27
Keyless Enter-N-Go ......................37, 224
Enter The Trunk ..........................20
Passive Entry ............................37
Passive Entry Programming ..................37
Keys ....................................17
Replacement ..........................24, 32
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)......................31
Lane Change And Turn Signals .................69
Lane Change Assist ..........................69
LaneSense................................274
Lap/Shoulder Belts .........................175
Latches..................................217
Hood ..................................97
Lead Free Gasoline .........................424
Leaks, Fluid ..............................217
Life Of Tires ..............................403
Light Bulbs ...........................217, 307
Lights...................................217
AirBag.........................131, 184, 215
Automatic Headlights ......................67
Brake Assist Warning ......................152
Brake Warning .......................132, 422
Bulb Replacement ........................307
Cruise .............................140, 141
Daytime Running .........................65
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ................65, 66
Engine Temperature Warning ................134
Exterior ...............................217
Fog ...................................68
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................301
Headlights ...........................64, 68
Headlights On With Wipers ..................67
Headlight Switch .........................64
High Beam ..............................66
High Beam/Low Beam Select .................66
Instrument Cluster ........................64
Intensity Control ..........................72
Interior ................................69
License ................................311
Lights On Reminder .......................6
8
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........135
Park ...............................67, 141
Passing ................................67
Reading ................................70
Seat Belt Reminder .......................134
Security Alarm ..........................135
12
INDEX 541
Service ................................307
Traction Control .........................152
Turn Signals ....................65, 69, 141, 217
Vanity Mirror ............................64
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . .134, 141
Loading Vehicle ........................283, 285
Capacities ..............................285
Tires..................................395
Load Shed Battery Saver On...................129
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction.............129
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor .............129
Locks
Automatic Door ..........................41
Auto Unlock .............................41
Child Protection ..........................41
Power Door .............................36
Low Tire Pressure System.....................166
Lubrication, Body ..........................375
Lug Nuts ................................422
Maintenance Free Battery .....................366
Maintenance Schedule .............353, 354, 357, 359
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .135, 143
Manual, Service............................532
Media Hub ...............................505
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ..............43, 47
Memory Seat ............................43, 47
Memory Seats And Radio ...................43, 47
Methanol ................................426
Mirrors ..................................60
Electric Powered ..........................62
Electric Remote ...........................62
Heated .................................63
Outside ................................62
Rearview .........................60, 61, 301
Vanity .................................64
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ................5
Monitor, Tire Pressure System..................166
Mopar Parts ..............................531
MP3 Control ..............................505
Multi-Function Control Lever ...................65
New V
ehicle Break-In Period ..................226
Occupant Restraints.........................172
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............424, 432
Oil Change Indicator ........................124
Reset .................................124
Oil, Engine............................368, 432
Capacity ...............................431
542 INDEX
Change Interval .........................368
Checking ..............................365
Dipstick ...............................365
Disposal ...............................370
Filter ..............................371, 432
Filter Disposal ...........................370
Identification Logo .......................369
Materials Added To .......................370
Pressure Warning Light ....................134
Recommendation .....................368, 431
Synthetic ..............................370
Viscosity ........................369, 370, 431
Oil Filter, Change ..........................371
Oil Filter, Selection..........................371
Oil Pressure Light ..........................134
Onboard Diagnostic System ...................142
Operating Precautions .......................142
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ...............5
Outside Rearview Mirrors .....................62
Overheating, Engine ........................342
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ...........5,532
Paddle Shifters ............................238
Paddle Shift Mode..........................238
Paint Care................................413
Panic Alarm ...............................20
Parking Brake .............................227
ParkSense System, Rear ......................267
Passing Light ..............................67
Passive Entry ..............................37
Performance ..............................486
Personalized Main Menu .....................437
Pets ....................................213
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ...........395
Power
Brakes ................................422
Deck Lid Release .........................98
Distribution Center (Fuses) ..................317
Door Locks ..............................
36
Mirrors ................................62
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ............112
Seats ..................................45
Steering ...............................242
Sunroof ................................94
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ..............58
Windows ...............................91
Power Seats
Forward ................................45
Lumbar ................................46
Rearward ...............................45
12
INDEX 543
Recline .................................46
Power Steering Fluid ........................432
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ................181
Preparation For Jacking ......................325
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................181
Radial Ply Tires ............................401
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap).............383
Radio Frequency
General Information ................25, 31, 33, 41
Radio Operation ...........................506
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...................74
Rear Axle (Differential) ......................388
Rear Camera ..............................279
Rear Cross Path............................161
Rear ParkSense System ......................267
Rear Seats, Folding ..........................53
Rear Wheel Drive
Towing ................................349
Recreational Towing.........................295
Reformulated Gasoline.......................425
Refrigerant ...............................372
Release, Hood..............................97
Reminder, Lights On .........................68
Reminder, Seat Belt .........................174
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm ..........................33
Panic Alarm .............................20
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........24, 32
Unlatch The Trunk ........................20
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .....................30
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features ......31
Uconnect Settings .........................31
Remote Trunk Release ........................98
Replacement Bulbs .........................307
Replacement Keys ........................24, 32
Replacement Tires ..........................404
Reporting Safety Defects .....................531
Restraints, Child ...........................197
Restraints, Head .......................54, 55, 56
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck...................345
Rotation, T
ires .............................411
RWD
Towing ................................349
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...................215
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................217
Safety Defects, Reporting .....................531
544 INDEX
Safety, Exhaust Gas .........................214
Safety Information, Tire ......................389
Safety Tips ...............................213
Schedule, Maintenance ................353, 354, 357
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......179
Seat Belt Reminder .........................134
Seat Belts .............................173, 215
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................179
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........179
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........182
Child Restraints .........................197
Energy Management Feature ................181
Extender ...............................180
Front Seat .......................173, 175, 177
Inspection ..............................215
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................177
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................175
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............179
Operating Instructions .....................177
Pregnant Women .........................181
Pretensioners ...........................181
Rear Seat ..............................175
Reminder ..............................174
Seat Belt Extender ........................180
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................181
Untwisting Procedure .....................179
Seat Belts Maintenance.......................416
Seats ...............................43, 45, 51
Adjustment ...........................43, 45
Easy Entry ..............................49
Head Restraints .....................54, 55, 56
Heated .................................51
Height Adjustment ........................45
Memory ................................47
Power .................................45
Rear Folding ..........................43, 53
Seatback
Release .......................43, 53
Tilting ...............................43, 45
Vented .................................52
Ventilated ...............................52
Security Alarm ..........................33, 135
Arm The System ..........................33
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............432
Sentry Key
Key Programming .........................32
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ......................31
Sentry Key Replacement ....................24, 32
Service Assistance ..........................528
Service Contract ...........................530
12
INDEX 545
Service Manuals ...........................532
Shifting .................................230
Automatic Transmission ................230, 232
Shoulder Belts.............................175
Side View Mirror Adjustment...................62
Signals, Turn ........................69, 141, 217
Siri.....................................520
SiriusXM Guardian
Vehicle Health Alert .......................519
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ....................410
Snow Tires ...............................406
Spare Tires .....................324, 406, 407, 408
Spark Plugs ..............................432
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ..........................432
Oil...................................432
Speed Control
Accel/Decel .........................244, 245
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ...................252
Cancel ................................246
Resume ...............................246
Set...................................244
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..........243, 244, 246
Sport Mode...............................241
Starting ..............................222, 223
Automatic Transmission ....................222
Button .................................25
Cold Weather ...........................225
Engine Fails To Start ......................225
Starting And Operating ...................222, 223
Starting Procedures ......................222, 223
Steering ..................................57
Column Lock ............................57
Power ................................242
Tilt Column ...........................57, 58
Wheel, Heated ...........................59
Wheel, Tilt ...........................57, 58
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................504
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . .
. .504
Storage ..................................413
Storage, Vehicle .........................89, 413
Storing Your Vehicle ........................413
Stuck, Freeing .............................345
Sunglasses Storage..........................115
Sun Roof .................................94
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag..........186
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................370
Telescoping Steering Column ................57, 58
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............88
546 INDEX
Tilt Steering Column ......................57, 58
Time Delay
Headlight ...............................68
Tire And Loading Information Placard............395
Tire Markings .............................389
Tires..........................217, 399, 406, 411
Aging (Life Of Tires) ......................403
Air Pressure ............................399
Chains ................................410
Changing .......................323, 330, 388
Compact Spare ..........................407
Flat Changing ...........................330
General Information ...................399, 406
High Speed .............................401
Inflation Pressure ........................400
Jacking ............................325, 388
Life Of Tires ............................403
Load Capacity .......................395, 396
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........137, 166
Quality Grading .........................411
Radial ................................401
Replacement .........................330, 404
Rotation ...............................411
Safety .............................389, 399
Sizes .................................391
Snow Tires .............................406
Spare Tires ......................324, 406, 408
Spinning ...............................402
Trailer Towing ...........................291
Tread Wear Indicators .....................402
Wheel Mounting .........................330
Wheel Nut Torque ........................422
Tire Safety Information.......................389
Tire Service Kit............330, 331, 332, 334, 337, 338
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .................289
To Open Hood .............................97
Towing ..................................285
Behind A
Motorhome ......................295
Disabled Vehicle .........................346
Guide .................................289
Recreational ............................295
Weight ................................289
Towing Behind A Motorhome ..................295
Traction ..............................295, 296
Traction Control ...........................155
Trailer Towing.............................285
Cooling System Tips ......................295
Hitches ................................288
Minimum Requirements ....................290
Tips ..................................294
12
INDEX 547
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..................289
Wiring ................................292
Trailer Towing Guide ........................289
Trailer Weight .............................289
Transfer Case
Fluid ...........................388, 432, 434
Maintenance ............................388
Transmission ..............................232
Automatic ..........................232, 387
Fluid ..............................432, 434
Maintenance ............................387
Shifting ...............................230
Transporting Pets ..........................213
Tread Wear Indicators .......................402
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid).........................98
Trunk Release Remote Control ..................98
Turn Signals............................69, 141
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings .................19, 20, 31, 439
Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch Display........463
Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display ................441
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ........31, 37, 439
Passive Entry Programming ..................37
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................411
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)........102
Universal Transmitter........................102
Unleaded Gasoline .........................424
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................179
USB....................................505
Vanity Mirrors .............................64
Vehicle Certification Label ....................284
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............421
Vehicle Loading .....................283, 285, 396
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................5
Vehicle Security Alarm........................33
Vehicle Storage..........................89, 413
Viscosity, Engine Oil .....................369, 370
Voice Command ...........................508
Voice
Recognition System (VR) .................508
Warning Flashers, Hazard ....................301
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions). . . .137
Warnings And Cautions .......................5
Warranty Information .......................531
Washer
Adding Fluid ...........................366
Washers, Windshield......................74, 366
548 INDEX
Washing Vehicle ...........................414
Water
Driving Through .........................296
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...................409
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...................409
Wind Buffeting ..........................94, 96
Window Fogging ...........................90
Windows .................................91
Power .................................91
Reset Auto-Up ...........................93
Windshield Defroster ........................215
Windshield Washers .......................73, 74
Fluid .................................366
Windshield Wiper Blades .....................376
Windshield Wipers ..........................73
Wipers Blade Replacement ....................376
Wipers, Intermittent .........................74
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ........................74
12
INDEX 549
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
WARNING:
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC
DID_3636001_18e_Charger_OM_EN_070318.indd 2 7/3/2018 11:22:01 AM
Charger
OWNER’S MANUAL
Fifth Edition Rev 1
Printed in the U.S.A.
18LD-126-AE
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2018
Charger
2018
DID_3636001_18e_Charger_OM_EN_070318.indd 1 7/3/18 11:19 AM
